248
Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051 Operating Manual Order Number 7KE3180-1AE

Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    6

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information SystemVAS 5051

Operating Manual Order Number 7KE3180-1AE

Page 2: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

xxx

Page 3: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Contents

Operating Manual VAS 5051IC79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Contents

1.1 General Notes .......................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Safety Instructions ................................................................................... 1-1

1.3 Designated Use ........................................................................................ 1-1

1.4 Associated Documents ............................................................................. 1-2

1.5 Area of Application ................................................................................. 1-2

2.1 Structure ................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051 ........ 2-1

2.1.2 Tester .................................................................................................... 2-3

2.1.3 Workshop Trolley ................................................................................. 2-9

2.1.4 Measuring Leads ................................................................................. 2-10

2.1.5 Printer ................................................................................................. 2-15

2.2 Mode of Operation ................................................................................. 2-17

2.2.1 VAS 5051 ............................................................................................ 2-17

2.2.2 Tester .................................................................................................. 2-18

2.2.3 Workshop Trolley ............................................................................... 2-18

2.2.4 Measuring Leads ................................................................................. 2-18

2.2.5 Printer ................................................................................................. 2-20

3.1 Preparation ............................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Connecting .............................................................................................. 3-5

3.3 Power-up .................................................................................................. 3-7

3.3.1 Tester .................................................................................................... 3-7

3.3.2 Printer ................................................................................................. 3-12

3.4 Switching Off ......................................................................................... 3-12

4.1 VAS 5051 ................................................................................................. 4-1

4.2 Tester ....................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2.1 Use of the Masks .................................................................................. 4-2

4.2.2 Using the Virtual Keyboard .................................................................. 4-7

4.3 Workshop Trolley .................................................................................. 4-11

4.4 Measuring Leads .................................................................................... 4-13

4.5 Printer .................................................................................................... 4-18

Page 4: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 5051II C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Contents

5.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 5-1

5.2 Start Vehicle Self-Diagnosis .................................................................... 5-2

5.3 Select Vehicle System ............................................................................. 5-4

5.4 Select Diagnostic Function ...................................................................... 5-6

5.4.1 "Interrogate Fault Memory" Diagnostic Function ................................ 5-7

5.4.2 "Final Control Diagnosis" Diagnostic Function ................................... 5-8

5.4.3 "Erase Fault Memory" Diagnostic Function ......................................... 5-9

5.4.4 End Output ............................................................................................ 5-9

5.4.5 "Read Data Block" Diagnostic Function ............................................ 5-10

5.4.6 "Adaption" Diagnostic Function ......................................................... 5-11

5.4.7 "Update Programming" Function ....................................................... 5-12

5.5 OBDII (US Vehicles) ............................................................................ 5-13

!" !

6.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 6-1

6.2 Starting the Test Instruments ................................................................... 6-2

6.3 Multimeter ............................................................................................... 6-3

6.3.1 Direct and Alternating Voltage Measurement ...................................... 6-5

6.3.2 Direct and Alternating Current Measurement ...................................... 6-7

6.3.3 Direct and Alternating Current Measurement via Current Pick-up ...... 6-8

6.3.4 Resistance Measurement ...................................................................... 6-9

6.3.5 Continuity Test ................................................................................... 6-10

6.3.6 Diode Test ........................................................................................... 6-11

6.3.7 Voltage DSO1 ..................................................................................... 6-12

6.3.8 Calibrate .............................................................................................. 6-13

6.4 Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO) ...................................................... 6-14

6.4.1 Channel A, Channel B ........................................................................ 6-16

6.4.2 Trigger Mode ...................................................................................... 6-19

6.4.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6-22

6.4.4 Freeze Frame with Cursor .................................................................. 6-24

6.4.4.1 Freeze Frame with One Cursor Displayed ....................................... 6-24

6.4.4.2 Freeze Frame with Both Cursors Displayed .................................... 6-25

6.4.5 Tips and Information .......................................................................... 6-27

#$ $ #

7.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 7-1

7.2 Start Guided Fault Finding ...................................................................... 7-3

7.3 "Go to" Destination Menu ....................................................................... 7-4

7.4 Vehicle Identification .............................................................................. 7-5

7.5 Connect Tester and Vehicle via Diagnostic Cable .................................. 7-7

Page 5: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Contents

Operating Manual VAS 5051IIIC79298-A3238-X120-04-19

7.6 Vehicle System Test ................................................................................ 7-8

7.7 Fault Memory Contents ......................................................................... 7-11

7.8 Test Plan ................................................................................................ 7-12

7.9 Function Test ......................................................................................... 7-13

7.9.1 Test Dialogs ........................................................................................ 7-16

7.9.2 Working with the Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO) ..................... 7-18

7.9.3 Exit Test Step ...................................................................................... 7-18

7.9.4 Returning to the "Function Test" Mask .............................................. 7-19

7.9.5 Exit Guided Fault Finding .................................................................. 7-19

7.10 Complaint Report ................................................................................. 7-20

7.11 Function/Component Selection ........................................................... 7-25

7.12 Documents ........................................................................................... 7-29

7.13 Interrupt Guided Fault Finding ............................................................ 7-31

7.14 Diagnosis Log ...................................................................................... 7-36

7.15 Function Test Log ................................................................................ 7-36

%& %

8.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 8-1

8.2 Start Application ...................................................................................... 8-1

8.2.1 Multimedia ............................................................................................ 8-2

'& '

9.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 9-1

9.2 Start Administration ................................................................................. 9-2

9.3 Select Function ........................................................................................ 9-3

9.4 Install Update ........................................................................................... 9-4

9.5 Self-test .................................................................................................... 9-4

9.6 Enter Workshop Code/Change Dealership Identifier .............................. 9-7

9.7 Signal Generator ...................................................................................... 9-7

9.8 Date/time .................................................................................................. 9-8

9.9 Expanded Functions ............................................................................... 9-10

9.10 Select Initial Graphic ........................................................................... 9-10

9.11 Contents List ........................................................................................ 9-10

9.12 Print Format ......................................................................................... 9-10

9.13 Installation or update of ESIS .............................................................. 9-11

9.14 Activate telediagnosis .......................................................................... 9-11

() (

10.1 Overview .............................................................................................. 10-1

10.2 Start Help ............................................................................................. 10-1

10.3 Help Overview ..................................................................................... 10-2

Page 6: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 5051IV C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Contents

10.4 Help on Topics ..................................................................................... 10-3

10.5 Help on the Selected Button ................................................................ 10-4

"*

11.1 Classification ....................................................................................... 11-1

11.2 Self-test ................................................................................................ 11-2

11.2.1 Self-test for Computer Hardware ...................................................... 11-2

11.2.2 Self-test of the Test Instrument and the Diagnostic Bus Unit. ......... 11-2

11.3 Symptoms, Causes and Solutions ........................................................ 11-2

11.3.1 Computer .......................................................................................... 11-2

11.3.2 Test Instruments ................................................................................ 11-3

11.3.3 Measuring Leads ............................................................................... 11-4

11.3.4 Printer ............................................................................................. 11-13

11.4 Fault Reports to Customer Service .................................................... 11-15

11.5 Exchanging Components ................................................................... 11-16

11.5.1 Tester .............................................................................................. 11-16

11.5.2 Workshop Trolley ........................................................................... 11-16

11.6 Parts List ............................................................................................ 11-17

11.6.1 Contents .......................................................................................... 11-17

+

12.1 Visual Check of the VAS 5051 ........................................................... 12-1

12.2 Tester ................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2.1 Cleaning the Touchscreen ................................................................. 12-2

12.2.2 Forming the Battery .......................................................................... 12-2

12.2.3 Changing the Battery ........................................................................ 12-3

12.2.4 Changing the Air Filter ..................................................................... 12-4

12.2.5 Changing the Fuse for Inline Current Measurement ........................ 12-5

12.3 Workshop Trolley ................................................................................ 12-6

12.4 Measuring Leads .................................................................................. 12-6

12.5 Printer .................................................................................................. 12-6

12.5.1 Changing the Toner Cartridge .......................................................... 12-7

12.5.2 Changing the Drum Unit .................................................................. 12-8

12.5.3 Cleaning the LED Array ................................................................... 12-9

12.5.4 Cleaning the Drum .......................................................................... 12-10

12.5.5 Cleaning the Printing Mechanism .................................................. 12-11

12.5.6 Printer Settings ................................................................................ 12-11

12.6 Calibration ......................................................................................... 12-11

"

13.1 Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051 with Workshop Trolley ..................................................... 13-1

Page 7: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Contents

Operating Manual VAS 5051VC79298-A3238-X120-04-19

13.2 Tester ................................................................................................... 13-1

13.2.1 Operating Data .................................................................................. 13-1

13.2.2 Test Instruments ................................................................................ 13-2

13.2.2.1 Multimeter ..................................................................................... 13-3

13.2.2.2 Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO) .............................................. 13-5

13.2.2.3 Expansion Inputs ........................................................................... 13-8

13.3 Measuring Leads .................................................................................. 13-8

13.4 Workshop Trolley ................................................................................ 13-8

13.5 Printer .................................................................................................. 13-9

$ &

14.1 Forms for Registration and Fault Reporting ........................................ 14-1

14.2 Service Addresses ................................................................................ 14-2

14.2.1 Assignment of countries to regional support centres ........................ 14-2

14.2.2 Regional support centres ................................................................... 14-4

14.3 OKI Addresses ..................................................................................... 14-6

14.4 KNÜRR Addresses .............................................................................. 14-8

"

!, !

Page 8: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 5051VI C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Contents

Appendices:

Appendices to chapter 1 General Information:

"Declaration of Conformity", "Zertificate of Calibration"

Appendix to chapter 3 Startup:

"Workshop Identification in VAS 5051"

Appendix to chapter 11 Troubleshooting:

"Parts List VAS 5051"

Appendix to chapter 12 Care and Maintenance:

"Printer Settings"

Appendix to chapter 13 Technical Data:

"Connector Use, Diagnostic Cable and Diagnostic Adapter"

Appendices to chapter 14 Forms and Addresses:

"Registration certificate for VAS 5051", "Fault Report Fax for VAS 5051"

Page 9: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Safety Notices

Operating Manual VAS 5051iC79298-A3238-X120-04-19

The safety notices in this operating manual and on the products themselves, have the following meanings:

Severe injury or damage may result if unqualified persons attempt to work on the equipment or if the safety notices in this operating manual or on the workshop trolley, tester or printer are disregarded.

General safety notices are listed below. Additional safety notices are given throughout the operating manual where they are relevant.

-

Means that death, severe injury or damage may result if the prescribed precauti-ons are not taken.

+

Means that minor injury or damage may result if the prescribed precautions are not taken.

.

This is important information about the product or how it is used, or indicates a part of the documentation requiring particular attention.

Page 10: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 5051ii C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Safety Notices

/0"&."&$1"2."+1

Read all the safety notices:

-

If the power cable or the tester is damaged, you must not use the tester until a qualified specialist has tested the equipment.

-

The power cable and the measuring leads must not be laid over tables, benches or cabinets. They must not be located near hot objects or rotating parts.

-

The length of the power cable must not be extended. Use only the supplied power cable as far as possible. If you exchange it be sure to read the technical information in chapter 13.

-

If you are not going to use the VAS 5051 for an extended period of time, switch it off using the on/off switch and disconnect it from the mains power if the bat-tery is charged. When disconnecting the power plug be careful not to pull on the cable; hold the plug itself and pull it from the socket.

-

The VAS 5051 must not be operated in the vicinity of open fuel containers, due to the risk of explosion or fire.

Page 11: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Safety Notices

Operating Manual VAS 5051iiiC79298-A3238-X120-04-19

-

Make sure there is adequate ventilation when you are working on vehicles with running motors, to prevent the risk of carbon monoxide poisoning.

-

Use the VAS 5051 only as described in the operating manual. Use only the spec-ified measuring leads.

-

The tester is a device of safety class 1 and is equipped with a safety tested power cable. It may only be connected to systems with equipment grounding conduc-tors (TN systems) and grounding sockets.

-

Strap the tester securely onto the back seat during test drives and connect it to the vehicle by way of the 3 meter diagnostic cable or the 3 meter combo diag-nostic cable. A second person must sit on the back seat to operate the tester.

-

Electric ignition systems carry voltages up to 30 kV. Generally applicable safety at work regulations must be followed at all times.

Page 12: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 5051iv C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Safety Notices

311/")11&$1"2."+1.&&$1/4&+15

-

If you open the equipment without authorization or perform improper repairs, you may put yourself in serious danger.

.

Fluctuations and deviation of the mains voltage beyond the permissible toler-ance may lead to electronics failures.

Page 13: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

General Information

Operating Manual VAS 50511-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

1 General Information

1.1 General Notes

This operating manual contains the necessary information for proper use of the Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051, henceforth des-ignated as "VAS 5051". The manual is intended for technically qualified person-nel with knowledge in the area of vehicle diagnostics and testing.

Knowledge of and technically flawless implementation of the safety instructions and warnings contained in this operating manual are essential for safe installa-tion, use and maintenance of the VAS 5051.

For reasons of clarity, this operating manual does not contain all the details of all implementations of the operating modes described, and cannot cover every con-ceivable case relating to installation, use, servicing and maintenance.

Likewise, the contents of the dialog masks shown here may differ slightly from those displayed on the tester.

1.2 Safety Instructions

Pay attention to the safety instructions for the VAS 5051. They are listed after the table of contents.

1.3 Designated Use

• The VAS 5051 may be used only on a vehicle.

• The described product was developed, manufactured, tested and documented in accordance with safety norms. Consequently, if the safety instructions, the specified commissioning procedure, the rules governing designated use and the service and maintenance recommendations are followed there is under normal circumstances no danger that the VAS 5051 will present no risk to property or to health and safety.

Page 14: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50511-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

General Information

1.4 Associated Documents

In addition to this operating manual, which is intended for use in the workshop, the following relevant technical documents also exist in relation to the VAS 5051:

Unpacking instruction for the VAS 5051 with workshop trolley:Located on the outside of the packaging. It describes how to unpack the VAS 5051 and how to remove materials used for transportation.

1.5 Area of Application

Fault detection and localization in vehicles with the help of

• guided fault finding,

• vehicle self-diagnosis and

• execution of measurements with a multimeter and oscilloscope1

• call up applications, such as "Multimedia", directly from an inserted CD

The VAS 5051 is characterized by

• varying diagnostic strategies,

• context-sensitive display of documents,

• print functions,

• workshop-oriented setup with a workshop trolley for the tester, a printer, han-gers for measuring leads and power distribution,

• battery buffering in case of power outage or change of workplace,

• intuitive operation via touchscreen and help functions.

Appendices: "Declaration of Conformity", "Zertificate of Calibration"

-

When you remove the tester or printer housing, certain parts of those devices will become accessible that may be under dangerously high tension.

1. The glossary arrow refers to an explanation of the marked concept in chapter 15.

Page 15: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendices to Chapter "General Information"

Operating Manual VAS 5051Page: 1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

EC Declaration of Conformity

Siemens AG Automatisierungstechnik Prozeßautomatisierung und -instrumente Fahrzeugprüftechnik Siemensallee 84D-76187 Karlsruhe

The device described in the following,VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-A11, 200-240 V, 50/60 Hzmanufactured by us,conforms to the following regulations:

- EMCEC Directive: "Electromagnetic compatibility" 89/396/EECamended by Council Directives 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC

- Low voltageEC Directive: "Electrical resources for use within specific voltage limits" 73/23/EEC

On behalf of the manufacturer

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Karlsruhe, September 15, 1997(date of creation)

Keller ........................... Dr. Funke ...........................(Name, title, function, signature (Name, title, function, signatureof the undersigned) of the undersigned)

Section Manager Engineering Management

Page 16: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 5051Page: 2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendices to Chapter "General Information"

C E R T I F I C A T E

SIEMENS AG

Automatisierungstechnik (AUT)

Prozeßautomatisierung

und Instrumente (AUT 3)

Fahrzeugprüftechnik (AUT 32)

manufactured and delivered the device

VAS 5051

EU version: C79298-A3238-A11

USA version: C79298-A3238-A12

No calibration is required

in the first three years after delivery

Section Manager AUT 32 QM AUT 32

Page 17: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50512-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

2 Structure and Mode of Operation

This chapter describes all components of the VAS 5051 for orientation purposes.

2.1 Structure

2.1.1 Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051

Three versions The complete Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051 (fig. 2-1), hereafter designated as "VAS 5051", comes in three versions:

• EU version: C79298-A3238-A11

• USA version: C79298-A3238-A12 and

• Special version (Taiwan, ...): A5E00056738

VAS 5051components

The VAS 5051 consists of the following components:

• Tester (section 2.1.2)

• Workshop trolley (section 2.1.3)

• Measuring leads (section 2.1.4)

• Printer (section 2.1.5)

Page 18: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50512-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Fig. 2-1 VAS 5051

Key to fig. 2-1:

1. Hangers for measuring leads (shown on the right: attached current pick-up and DSO measuring leads)

2. Shockproof handle bar (ram protection bar)

3. Power cable

4. Free wheel

5. Braked wheels

6. Drawer

7. Printer

8. Printer cover

9. IrDA adapter

10. Tester

1

2

45

63

7

8

10

9

Page 19: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50512-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

2.1.2 Tester

Front The following components are located on the front:

• LED array

• Touchscreen

Fig. 2-2 Front of tester (with start mask)

VAS 5051Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information SystemVersion - GB -/V 06.00,18/06/1998

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments

Guided fault finding

Help

Administration

Print

Applications

92/.6:$*(1$*

Page 20: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50512-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

LED array The three LEDs on the front of the tester show its operating status.

Fig. 2-3 LED array

Table 2-1 Meanings of the LEDs

LED 1, two-color Lights up:

• Green to indicate external power supply from the mains or the vehicle electrical system (if mains and on-board system power is applied simultane-ously, the supply comes from the mains).

• Yellow to indicate internal power supply from the battery.

• Yellow (flashing) to indicate internal power sup-ply from the battery when it is almost discharged

• Green/yellow (flashing alternately) to indicate external power supply from the mains or vehicle electrical system when the battery has been remo-ved or is defective.

LED 2, single-color Lights up green when the battery is charging.

LED 3, single-color Lights up red when the air filter is clogged and so the tester is no longer being cooled sufficiently. If LED 3 is lit, the tester switches off automatically after approx. 10 seconds. For actions see section 12.2.4.

Page 21: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50512-5C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Left side On the left side there are standard interfaces behind a cover:

1. VGA interface

2. RS232 interface

3. Keyboard interface (PS/2)

4. Two PCMCIA ports

Outside the cover are:

1. Power connection socket

2. Grounding screw

Fig. 2-4 Left side of tester

-

The grounding screw must not be loosened or removed, otherwise the opera-tional safety of the tester is no longer guaranteed.

1

23

4

5

6

Page 22: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50512-6 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Right side Located on the right side of the tester are:

1. 3.5 inch diskette drive

2. CD-ROM drive

3. Audio output

4. IrDA printer interface

5. On/Off switch (battery charging cannot be switched off)

Fig. 2-5 Right side of tester

.

When the CD drawer is opened, sensitive parts of the reading optics are expo-sed. Make sure that these do not become dirty or damaged.

When you insert a CD, make sure it engages fully in the center fixing on the ver-tical CD drawer.

When the CD drive is in operation the tester must not be rotated more than 15° (from the vertical or horizontal).

Page 23: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50512-7C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Top The connections for the measuring leads, a fuse and a carrying handle are located on the top of the tester.

1. DSO1: Connection for DSO measuring lead 1

2. TZ: Connection for trigger pick-up

3. DSO2: Connection for DSO measuring lead 2

4. kV: Connection for kV pick-up

5. U/R/D: Connection for U/R/D measuring lead for voltage and resistance measurement, diode and continuity check

6. 6Connections for U/R/D measuring lead (additional leads for probe)

7. 10A: Connection for U/R/D measuring lead for inline current measurement

8. COM: Connection for COM measuring lead

9. Fuse for inline current measurement (not via current pick-up)

10. DIAG: Connection for the various diagnostic cables

11. Carrying handle

12. T/D: Connection for temperature and pressure sensor (future applications)

13. SZ: Connection for current pick-up 50 A or 500 A

Fig. 2-6 Top of tester

8910111213

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

F12A

SZ T/D

TZ KV DIAG COM

.

The symbol : for the U/R/D and 10 A connections signifies that the specified input level of max. 60 V must not be exceeded (see also chapter 13).

.

In case of fault, replace fuse for inline current measurement (fig. 2-6, 9) only with original part (see parts list, appendix to Chapter "Troubleshooting").

Page 24: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50512-8 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Back On the back of the tester are:

1. Nameplate

2. Warning notice

3. Cover for air filter compartment

4. Cover for battery compartment

Fig. 2-7 Back of tester

F-Nr. - .....

Page 25: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50512-9C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

2.1.3 Workshop Trolley

The workshop trolley consists of the following components:

1. Side hanger for measuring leads. Additional ones are located on the back of the workshop trolley (not shown in fig. 2-8).

2. Side member

3. Cable reel

4. Shockproof handle bar

5. Free wheel

6. Base frame

7. Braked wheels

8. Drawer for dust cover, operating manual, small parts and up to 3 CDs; the printer stands on the drawer

9. Tester mounting

Fig. 2-8 Workshop trolley

1

2

3

4

3

67

8

9

5

Page 26: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50512-10 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

2.1.4 Measuring Leads

The measuring lead sets consist of diagnostic, testing and accessory testing cable sets.

Diagnosticcable set

The diagnostic cable set contains:

Scope of supply: Standard, Accessory - not included

PS - Power supply cable to operate the tester with the vehicle battery.

Testingcable set

The testing cable set contains:

• U/R/D measuring lead (positive pole)

• COM measuring lead (negative pole)

• Two DSO measuring leads of the same type

• Current pick-up 50 A

Accessory testing cable set

The optional accessory testing cable set includes:

• Current pick-up 500 A

• Trigger pick-up

• kV pick-up

The hangers on the measuring leads are designed to fit the attachments on the workshop trolley.

Cable EU version

US version

Special version

Diagnostic cable 5 m, without PS, with ISO 9141

Diagnostic cable 3 m, with PS, with ISO 9141

Combo diagnostic cable 5 m, without PS, without CAN, with ISO 9141/J1850,

Combo diagnostic cable 3 m, with PS, with J1850/CAN, with ISO 9141/J1850,

Diagnostic adapter for old systems

Diagnostic cable LT, with PS

.

The test probes for the U/R/D measuring lead, the COM measuring lead and the DSO measuring leads have protective sheaths from which just a small measur-ing tip protrudes. The sheaths serve as touch guards and can be removed as needed.

Page 27: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50512-11C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Diagnostic cable/combo diagnostic cable

The diagnostic cables and combo diagnostic cables are available in a 5 m version for use on the workshop trolley and a 3 m version for use in the vehicle. The 5 m versions are installed in the VAS 5051 when shipped; the 3 m versions are sup-plied in the accompanying pack.

The diagnostic cable consists of an 18-pin plug (marked black), the cable and a 16-pin vehicle diagnostic plug to SAE J1962 standard.

Fig. 2-9 Diagnostic cable

The combo diagnostic cable has an additional four wires to connect to vehicles with a bus system based on the SAE J1850 protocol. The 3 m version also allows for connection to vehicles with a bus system based on the CAN protocol.

Diagnostic adapter The diagnostic adapter consists of two 2-pin flat diagnostic plugs, two cables and the 16-pin diagnostic jack. It can be used with the 5 m or 3 m diagnostic cables.

Supply to the tester from the vehicle electrical system over the 3 m diagnostic cable also is provided via the diagnostic adapter.

Fig. 2-10 Diagnostic adapter

.

Only the 3 m versions of both cables have wires to supply the tester from the vehicle electrical system (vehicle battery).

Page 28: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50512-12 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Diagnostic cable LT The diagnostic cable LT supplied in the accompanying pack is 3 m long and con-sists of an 18-pin plug (marked black), the cable and a 16-pin vehicle diagnostic plug to SAE J1962 standard.

The diagnostic cable LT permits function-oriented addressing of Daimler-Benz vehicle systems. The battery voltage can also be monitored with this cable. Ter-minal 15 is switched through so that "Ignition on" is automatically detected.

Fig. 2-11 Diagnostic cable LT

U/R/D measuring lead and COM measuring lead

The U/R/D measuring lead consists of a 3-pin connecting plug, the cable and the test probe with built-in button. The connecting plug is fitted with one 4 mm and two 2 mm banana plugs arranged in a row. The 2 mm banana plugs carry the but-ton signal.

Fig. 2-12 U/R/D measuring lead (with protective sheath, not shown)

The COM measuring lead consists of the cable with a 4 mm banana plug and a 4 mm test probe.

Fig. 2-13 COM measuring lead (with protective sheath, not shown)

.

This cable is equipped with additional wires to supply the tester from the vehicle electrical system (vehicle battery).

Page 29: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50512-13C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

DSO measuring leads (DSO1 and DSO2)

The two identical-design DSO measuring leads consist of one 12-pin connector (marked blue), the cable, the red 4 mm test probe with button and active probe head, and the black 4 mm banana plug.

A blue clip labeled "DSO1" or "DSO2" as appropriate is fitted on the cable lead-ing to the test probe to distinguish between the cables.

Fig. 2-14 DSO measuring lead (with protective sheath, not shown)

Current pick-up 50 A The current pick-up 50 A consists of one 8-pin connector (marked yellow), the cable and the actual current pick-up.

Fig. 2-15 Current pick-up 50 A

Current pick-up 500 A

The design concept of the current pick-up 500 A is the same as for the pick-up 50 A.

Trigger pick-up The trigger pick-up consists of a 5-pin connector (marked black), the cable and the actual trigger pick-up.

Fig. 2-16 Trigger pick-up

DSO 2

Stromzange 50A

C79298-A3238-B525-51

SIEMENS

Page 30: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50512-14 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

kV pick-up The kV pick-up consists of a 5-pin connector (marked red), the cable and the sen-sor.

Fig. 2-17 kV pick-up

Page 31: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50512-15C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

2.1.5 Printer

Front On the front of the printer the following components can be seen:

1. Display panel

2. Key array

3. Paper tray

4. Paper cassette

5. Paper tray extension

6. Release button (one each on the left and right sides of the housing cover)

7. On/Off switch

Fig. 2-18 Front view of printer

.

Model OL610ex LED page printers and several successor models of largely identical design are in use. This manual describes only the use of model OL610ex. For the technical specifications of the individual models refer to section 13.5.

R

OL 610eOL 61Oe/PS P ag e Pr inter

R

MENU 1

M e n u 2

MENU 1

M e n u 2

MENU 1

M e n u 2

MENU 1

M e n u 2

MENU 1

M e n u 2

MENU 1

M e n u 2

MENU 1

M e n u 2

MENU 1

M e n u 2

Press 2 seconds

Ready

1 2 3

45

67

Page 32: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50512-16 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Back The following components are located on the back of the printer:

1. Power socket

2. Centronics interface for connection of the IrDA adapter

Fig. 2-19 Back of printer

1

2

Page 33: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50512-17C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

IrDA The printer is connected to the tester by way of an infrared (IrDA) adapter.

1. IrDA interface on the tester.

2. IrDA adapter (leading to printer’s Centronics interface) on holder. The groove around the adapter serves to locate the holder.

Fig. 2-20 IrDA adapter

2.2 Mode of Operation

2.2.1 VAS 5051

You can mobilize the VAS 5051 in your workshop. Connected to a vehicle by measuring leads and sensors, it electronically supports fault finding and localiza-tion.

The core component is the tester, which remains part of the VAS 5051 in work-shop operations but can also be operated separately. You can print results on the integral printer.

1

2

Page 34: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50512-18 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

2.2.2 Tester

The tester offers the operating modes "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis", "Test Instru-ments" and "Guided Fault Finding". This allows it to be used as a fault reader, as a test instrument and as an intelligent fault identification system.

The operating system and applications are stored in the tester. It can be operated with 120 to 230 V AC or from the vehicle electrical system. A built-in battery delivers up to 30 minutes of constant power when needed, so the tester does not have to be switched off when it is moved.

The tester reacts to inputs made by pressing your finger (or any other blunt object) directly on the touchscreen. An IrDA interface provides a wireless link to the prin-ter.

2.2.3 Workshop Trolley

The workshop trolley is a mobile unit with mountings for the tester, the measur-ing leads and a printer. It has a separate mains power inlet as well as a power dis-tribution system with permanently fitted cables for connection of the tester and the printer.

With the workshop trolley the VAS 5051 can be moved around the workshop. Dis-plays and controls can be adjusted ergonomically for the user. It also provides storage space for accessories.

2.2.4 Measuring Leads

The measuring leads and sensors form the test interface between VAS 5051 and the vehicle. They acquire the signals coming from the test object and route them to the VAS 5051 for processing.

U/R/D measuring lead and COM measuring lead

The two measuring leads are used for the floating multimeter. Both leads always must be adapted. The button built into the test probe of the U/R/D measuring lead controls the measurement. Depending on the selected software function, you can start or end the measurement (freeze frame) or execute special functions.

Page 35: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50512-19C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

DSO measuring leads (DSO1 and DSO2)

The two identical-design DSO1 and DSO2 measuring leads are used for the two- channel digital storage oscilloscope. Both measurement connections must always be adapted for each measuring lead used for measurement. The button in the red positive test probe controls measured value acquisition. Depending on the selected software function, you can start or end the measurement (freeze frame) or execute special functions.

The DSO1 lead can also be used for voltage measurements to ± 400 V (see fig. 6-2).

Current pick-up 50 A and 500 A

The current pick-up can be opened so that it can be clamped around the cable whose current is to be measured. You can adapt cables up to 12 mm (current pick-up 50 A) and 28 mm (current pick-up 500 A) in diameter. The accuracy is heavily dependent on gapless closure of the two prongs of the pick-up. To avoid measure-ment error, such as from dirt contamination of the core surfaces, the current pick-ups 50 A and 500 A each have a closure control mechanism. This signals to the software that the pick-up is closed and a measurement can be taken.

Trigger pick-up The trigger pick-up can be opened and clamped around the ignition cable used for triggering. You can adapt ignition cables up to 11 mm in diameter. The trigger pick-up picks up the start pulse as from which the signal characteristic is to be displayed on the oscilloscope. For example, clamp the trigger pick-up to ignition cable 1 when you want to display a signal as from the firing point of the first cyl-inder.

kV pick-up The kV pick-up records the ignition voltage amplitude and the ignition voltage characteristic in the ignition system. It can be opened so that it can be clamped to an ignition cable on the vehicle. There it works as a capacitive voltage divider. You can adapt ignition cables of between 5 and 9 mm in diameter.

Diagnostic cable/combo diagnostic cable

The diagnostic cables and combo diagnostic cables are used to connect the tester to a vehicle. This gives you access to the installed vehicle systems, to the battery voltage monitor on terminal 30, to the ignition status detector on terminal 15 (if fitted), to activation of external devices with the FK-L wire, and to the power supply from the vehicle electrical system.

Diagnostic adapter The diagnostic adapter enables connection of vehicles with a 2x2-pin diagnostic connection to the diagnostic cable or the combo diagnostic cable.

Diagnostic cable LT The diagnostic cable LT allows for connection to a light truck.

Page 36: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50512-20 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

2.2.5 Printer

The LED printer is used to print screen masks, test results, etc. It uses DIN A4 paper in the European version and US letter paper in the US version.

LED array The LED array exposes the points on the image drum at which toner is to be absorbed.

Image drum unit The image drum unit (see fig. 2-21) contains the light-sensitive image drum (1), a heated roller coated with an organic semiconductor and the toner cassette (2). An image of the page to be printed is transferred to the heated roller via the LED array. The exposed areas absorb the toner, which is transferred to the paper and fixed there by heat.

Fig. 2-21 Image drum unit

1 2

Page 37: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50512-21C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Display panel The printer display panel shows messages such as the ready status ("ON-LINE"), low toner, load paper, and paper out (see fig. 2-22).

Fig. 2-22 Display panel

The yellow LED ("Ready") next to the display panel indicates the status of the printer. When it lights up, the printer is ready to receive data and to prepare the data for printing. The LED flashes while the data is being received and during printing. The light goes out when the printer is not ready to receive data, such as during manual paper feed or when an error occurs.

IrDA adapter Communication with the tester is effected by way of the IrDA adapter. As long as no print job has been delivered, the LED of the IrDA adapter flashes briefly every three seconds. When a print job is being processed, the LED must "flicker" in rhythm with the data transfer.

OL 610e Pe rsona l Page Pr in te r

OKI

A4 OTHER ENVB5A5 LTR

Page 38: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50512-22 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Structure and Mode of Operation

Page 39: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

Operating Manual VAS 50513-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

3 Startup

This chapter describes how to set up the VAS 5051 ready for starting in just a few minutes.

3.1 Preparation

Protective sheeting for the printer cover

Remove the protective sheeting from both sides of the printer cover.

Check the connec-tions

Connections may have become loose in transit. Check the connections in the fol-lowing order:

1. Power connection - workshop trolley, printer and Centronics interface:Pull the printer cover slightly forward. Check the power connections on the mains filter and the printer in the now freely accessible printer compartment (fig. 3-5).Check the Centronics port on the printer at the same time, and make sure its retaining clips are locked in above the IrDA adapter’s connector mounting.Replace the printer cover in its original position.

2. Tester power connection: Check the power connection on the tester.

3. Make certain all measuring lead connections are secure.

4. Check that the IrDA adapter is firmly fitted.

Insert toner cartridge

When the VAS 5051 is shipped, the printer is connected to the workshop trolley and preset to its default settings. However, for shipping the toner is packed sepa-rately. You must insert the toner into the printer before it can be used.

Install the toner cartridge as follows:

1. Press the release buttons on either side of the printer cover (see fig. 2-18) and open it upward.

2. Remove the packaging from the new cartridge. Sealing tape on the underside of the cartridge prevents toner from running out. Remove the entire length of the tape.

Page 40: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50513-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

3. With the opening facing down, insert the toner cartridge into the left side of the cartridge tray in the drum unit. The blue handle on the toner cartridge must be on the right side. Press it into the tray until it lies flat in the printer.

4. Using a little bit of force, move the blue handle all the way back to lock the toner cartridge in the printer.

Loading paper !2"#$!

1. Press the curved handle on the cassette inwards slightly. The cassette is un-locked. Remove the cassette completely from the housing (see fig. 3-1).

2. Place the paper in the cassette. Notice the PAPER FULL marking on the sides (see fig. 3-2) and do not insert more paper than indicated by the marking.

3. Set the side and back paper feed so that there is about a half millimeter space. Tip the back feed slightly forward to move it.

4. Insert the paper bin into the printer until it locks.

Fig. 3-1 Printer; press paper cassette to release

Ebene 1R

OL 600e

Page 41: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

Operating Manual VAS 50513-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Fig. 3-2 Side (above) and back (below) paper feed

Extending the paper tray

You can increase the size of the paper tray by extending the front. A metal frame piece can be opened out (see fig. 3-3).

Fig. 3-3 Extending the paper tray

Page 42: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50513-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

Adjusting the tester mounting

The swivel mechanism for the tester mounting is locked in place for transporta-tion. Use an 8 mm Alan wrench to set both sides so that the tester’s inclination can change but it remains stable in every position.

Fig. 3-4 Sketch: swivel mechanism for tester mounting (right side)

3

1 2

1 Tester2 Tester mounting3 8 mm Alan wrench

Page 43: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

Operating Manual VAS 50513-5C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

3.2 Connecting

Connecting the power

Connect the VAS 5051 to the mains power by the 6 meter power cable on the workshop trolley. The top, two-color LED on the front of the tester begins to glow green; the tester’s integral cooling fan begins to run audibly.

Fig. 3-5 Power cable connection

1

2

34

5

6

7

4 a 4

14 b 1 a

1 Power cable workshop trolley 1a Appliance plug2 Cable housing3 Printer cover4 Mains filter4a Power cable printer 4b Power cable tester 5 Output cable cover6 Rubber cable holder7 Tension release

Page 44: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50513-6 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

To exchange the power cable:

1. Remove parts (5) through (7).

2. Pull the printer cover (3) forward slightly.

3. Withdraw the appliance plug (1a) from the mains filter (4) and detach the po-wer cable (1) from the workshop trolley.

4. Insert the new power cable in reverse order.

-

The European version comes as standard with a German power plug. If you are unable to plug in the power plug in your country, you can exchange it for a local design conforming to the standard for use in grounded power supply systems (TN systems to VDE 8085, EN 60950, IEC 950, UL 1950, CSA 22.2 No. 950).

In the USA and Canada, please use a UL or CSA approved power cable.

Operation on ungrounded systems or impedance grounded systems (IT net-works) is not permitted.

Page 45: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

Operating Manual VAS 50513-7C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

3.3 Power-up

3.3.1 Tester

On/Off switch Switch the tester on by moving the black on/off switch on the right side of the tester to the "I" position (see fig. 3-6).

Fig. 3-6 Position of the on/off switch on the tester (arrow)

Run-up When you operate the on/off switch, the tester begins to "run up". The software system is loaded from the hard drive to the main memory. Various messages appear during run-up, such as driver messages of the operating system and start messages for various system programs. These messages are not relevant to work-shop operations.

User-friendly opera-tion by touchscreen

Apart from the on/off switch, the tester is operated by way of a touchscreen. Dia-log boxes with information, selection lists, pictures and labeled buttons for func-tions and actions appear on the screen.

For additional information on how to operate the tester, see chapter 4.

92/.6:$*(1$*

Page 46: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50513-8 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

Start mask (initial startup)

Once the run-up is completed, the following mask appears for example display-ing the current software version.

Fig. 3-7 Start mask after initial startup (example without marque separation)

Enter workshop code (initial startup)

The tester must be assigned your workshop code before it can be operated in you workshop. Press the "Administration" button (fig. 3-7). The following mask appears. It contains a list of all functions that can be accessed in "Administration" mode.

Fig. 3-8 "Administration" mask, selecting a function

Help

Administration

VAS 5051

Print

Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information SystemVersion - GB - / V01.00 24/12/1999

Administration

Select function Administration

Equipment number: 12345

Go to Help

Install updateSelf-testEnter workshop codeSignal generatorDate/timeExpanded functionsSelect initial graphicContents listPrint formatInstallation or update of ESISActivate Telediagnosis

Print

Page 47: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

Operating Manual VAS 50513-9C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

When you select the "Enter Workshop Code" function, you can enter your VZ/importer number, your dealership number and your dealership identifier (see also the appendix at the end of this chapter).

When the function has been selected with the selection bar a numeric keyboard appears on screen for you to enter the "VZ/Importer Number" and the "Dealer-ship Number" and an alphanumeric keyboard for the "Dealership Identifier" (see fig. 3-9). Enter the data in the order shown in table 3-1.

To learn how to operate the virtual keyboards, see section 4.2.2.

Change dealership identifier

Once you have entered the workshop code, the "Enter Workshop Code" function is replaced by the "Change Dealership Identifier" function. The workshop code you entered cannot be changed in this mask. You can only access the dealership identifier to update it if necessary.

Fig. 3-9 Entry of the workshop code, the dealership identifier is being entered

.

When you have entered the dealership number you are prompted to confirm the data entered so far. If you choose "Yes" the data cannot be changed later by the dealer!

Table 3-1 Workshop code and dealership identifier

Code and identifier Mode of input

VZ-/Importer number Three digits between 0 and 9

Dealership number Five digits between 0 and 9

Dealership identifier Up to two lines each with 60 letters and digits

Enter workshop codeAdministration

Enter dealership identifier(max. 2 lines of 60 characters each)

C z x c v b n m Q

a s d f g h j k l SH

q w e r t y u i o p

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Go to Help

Equipment Number: 00123VZ/Importer Number: 123Dealership Identifier: 12345

abc123ABC123

Print

Page 48: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50513-10 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

Back tostart mask

Choose the "Go to" button and then select the "Exit" option to return to the start mask.

Once you have entered the workshop code, the tester is ready for use and displays the following start mask for example:

Fig. 3-10 Start mask (example with marque separation)

Devices with marque separation display the version identifier of the base CD in the Start mask. It consists of the language ID, version number and version date.

The start mask provides the following options:

• Vehicle self-diagnosis, see chapter 5

• Test instruments, see chapter 6

• Guided fault finding, see chapter 7

• Applications, see chapter 8

• Administration, see chapter 9

• Help, see chapter 10

• Print You can use the Print function to generate a screen dump (hardcopy) in all modes. In "Vehicle self-diagnosis" and "Guided fault finding" modes you can also print out logs documenting the work carried out and the results of it (see there for more information).

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments

Help

Administration

Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information SystemVersion - GB - / V01.00 24/12/1999

VAS 5051

Guided fault finding

Applications

Print

Page 49: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

Operating Manual VAS 50513-11C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Only devices with marque separation: Installation of mar-que-specific CDs

To enable guided fault finding on devices with marque separation, you must then install one or more marque-specific CD(s) as follows.

1. Open the CD drive and insert the marque-specific CD you want to use. Fol-low the instructions for inserting CDs given in section 2.1.2!

2. Close the CD drive.

3. Choose the "Administration" button.

4. From the mask which then appears choose "Update-Installation" (fig. 3-8. For more details on this function refer to section 9.4). Confirm the security prompt which then appears.

5. The contents of the marque-specific CD are installed in the VAS 5051. An on-screen progress indicator allows you to track the installation routine. As soon as it is finished, the VAS 5051 quits "Administration" mode and brings the Start mask back up. The Start mask graphic is a picture of the installed vehicle marque. In the top right-hand corner of the screen a marque icon in-dicates which marque-specific CD(s) is/are installed on the VAS 5051.

Fig. 3-11 Start mask after installation of a typical marque-specific CD

6. Remove the CD from the drive.

Install other marque-specific CDs as necessary by repeating steps 1-6.

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments

Help

Administration

Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information SystemVersion - GB - / V01.00 24/12/1999

VAS 5051

Guided fault finding

Applications

Print

Page 50: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50513-12 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Startup

3.3.2 Printer

On/Off switch If the on/off switch on the left side of the printer is off, switch it to ON (see fig. 2-18). You will see the message "INITIALIZING" in the display field while it is starting up. Once the printer is ready, the display shows "ON-LINE HP4"; the yellow LED ("Ready") next to the display panel lights.

The printer can remain on because it switches automatically to standby mode.

At the bottom of the display panel there are markings for six different paper for-mats. Once the printer has initialized, it displays the format used in the paper tray. DIN A4 is the standard format used in the European version of the VAS 5051; US Letter Format is used in the US version.

3.4 Switching Off

Switch off the tester by setting the black On/Off switch (fig. 3-6) on the right-hand side of the tester to "0". Use the save facility in vehicle self-diagnosis (section 5.1) or guided fault finding (section 7.13). The switch-off process is ended when the touchscreen disappears.

Appendix: Workshop identification in the VAS 5051

.

When a print job is started, standby mode is automatically canceled and the internal heating element is switched on. When the operating temperature is reached (after approx. 60 s) printing begins.

Page 51: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendix to Chapter "Startup"

Operating Manual VAS 5051Page: 1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Workshop identification in VAS 5051

Three elements are used for worldwide device identification and unique user allocation:

The equipment number (identical to the last five digits of the F-Nr. (serial number) on the nameplate) is saved in the device and cannot be changed by the user.

The VZ/importer number and dealership number must be entered by the user on initial startup (administra-tion).

VZ/Importer number for users in Volkswagen AG plants

For users in plants, the VZ/importer number is assigned the telephone number (abbreviated dial code from Wolfsburg).

The cost center is stored without the index as a 5-digit dealership number with a leading zero.Example: Cost center 1949/2 = Dealership number 01949

Users outside the Group

The VZ/importer and dealership numbers are issued by the Volkswagen AG Workshop Equipment/Test Instruments department and maintained in a list.

Equipment number XXXXX (00000 - 30000)

VZ/Importer number XXX (000 - 999)

Dealership number XXXXX (00000 - 99999)

Plant Short dial code

Wolfsburg 111

Hanover 112

Braunschweig 113

Kassel 114

Emden 115

Ingolstadt Audi AG 116

Salzgitter 117

Mosel VW Saxony 118

Karmann Osnabrück 119

Neckarsulm Audi AG 823

Brussels 412

Page 52: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 5051Page: 2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendix to Chapter "Startup"

Page 53: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50514-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

4 Operation

4.1 VAS 5051

The general operation of the VAS 5051 is described in the following sections dealing with the individual components: the tester, the workshop trolley, the mea-suring leads and the printer.

Mode-specific operation is described in the relevant chapters.

4.2 Tester

Touchscreen The entire touch-sensitive surface of the screen is designated as the touchscreen. The screen senses touch by a human finger or other object, thereby replacing the conventional function of a mouse or keyboard.

Selecting To select an element (text or button), you must touch it on the screen. It changes color to indicate that it has been selected. Text turns white and is high-lighted by a black selection bar; buttons turn dark gray (see page 4-3). As long as you are touching the screen, you can change the current selection. When you stop touching the screen the selected element is activated.

.

The screen reacts to all touching. When using the tester, make sure it cannot be touched unintentionally by equipment or people.

+

Do not use any sharp, hot or color-transferring objects to operate the screen. This will result in damage.

Page 54: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50514-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

4.2.1 Use of the Masks

Fig. 4-1 Overview - Masks

1. Mask (screen display)

2. Button on the navigation bar

3. Work window

4. Information window

5. Selection bar

6. Dialog box

7. Scroll bar

8. Pointer

9. Navigation bar

Masks (1) The graphical displays on the screen are called "masks". They display all infor-mation and control functions.

The tester masks shown all have the same structure: the lower portion contains a bar with operating elements (the navigation bar), the middle and largest portion contains the work window in which you make your selection or enter values. The information window is above the work window.

Guided fault findingVehicle identification

Select body version

VWPassat 1997>1997Estate

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

SaloonEstate Information

CloseOverview

Text

1

4

6

9

3

2

8

5

.

If the tester is not used for several minutes, the screensaver is activated. As soon as you touch the screen near the upper edge, the last activated mask is dis-played.

Page 55: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50514-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Buttons (2) Each mask contains different buttons. You can select various functions with these buttons.

You can recognize whether a button is active by its color. If the button is dark-ened, it has been pressed and activated.

Work window (3) The work window is the largest portion of the mask. The display changes depending on the operating mode.

Informationwindow (4)

Most masks contain two information windows above the work window.

The left one shows the following information:

• 1st line: Name of the operating mode (example: Vehicle Self-Diagnosis, Test Instruments, Guided Fault Finding, Administration).

• 2nd line: Name of the displayed subfunction within the operating mode (ex-ample: Vehicle Identification).

• 3rd and 4th line: User instructions (example: Select body version) or status display (example: Function not available).

The information window on the right shows the terms that you have selected pre-viously (example: - in the guided fault finding - VW - Passat 1997> 1997 - Estate). In "Test Instruments" mode error messages are also shown here.

pressed, activated button

You have selected this button. As soon as you stop touching the screen, the selected command will be exe-cuted.

viewable, active button

You can see this button on the screen, but have not selected it.

.

The contents of the work window and the information windows shown in this operating manual are examples only and do not necessarily correspond to the contents of your tester.

Page 56: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50514-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Selection bar (5) When you select a line within the work window, your selection is highlighted by the selection bar. The selection bar is black; the text portion you select turns white.

In most cases, the next mask is activated as soon as you stop touching the touch-screen after you have marked a text.

Otherwise, the tester offers you the option of selecting several texts. Select all text you want, then to move to the next mask choose the "Continue" button (see table 4-3).

Dialog box (6) A dialog box is a small mask within a main mask displaying additional informa-tion, user options and error messages, in order to execute further steps in the selected program.

The following are some of the buttons which may appear in the dialog boxes:

Help appears in a dialog box. For information on using Help see chapter 10.

.

As long as a dialog box is open, the buttons in the main mask cannot be selected. You must first touch a button in the dialog box for it to close.

Table 4-1 Dialog box buttons (selection)

Button Meaning

Cancel You cancel an operation and go back to the mask that is still visible in the background. This function also appears in the pull-up menu "Go to" when you choose the "Go to" button. If you select "Cancel" there, you go back to the first sub-mask of your operating mode.

Display You can display image or text documents.

Exit You exit an work operation and go back to the system start mask. This function also appears in the pull-up menu "Go to" when you choose the "Go to" button. If you select "Exit" there, you return to the start mask.

OK You confirm with "OK" and go to the next mask. The operation is executed.

Pause Work is interrupted for a short time and then resumed.

Close The dialog box is closed.

Overview A selection list is displayed from which you can select the desired text or operation.

Interrupt Work is interrupted for a longer period and your data are saved.

Page 57: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50514-5C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Scroll bar (7) If the complete text cannot be displayed within a dialog box or a mask, a scroll bar appears on the right-hand edge. It consists of a slide and two arrows. The length of the slide shows you whether it is a large or small document. The smaller the slide, the larger the portion of the text that is not displayed. To read the text, place your finger on the slide and move it up or down. The desired text becomes visible. You also can scroll by line-by-line. If you tap on the "Down arrow" ( %the text moves one line up; if you tap on the "Up arrow " ( )the text moves one line down.

Pointer (8) The tester pointer takes on various shapes depending on its current function.

Table 4-2 Pointer shapes

Appearance Function Note

The "arrow" is the form of the indi-cator with which you select functions or buttons. The arrow is always located where you place your finger on the screen. -#

The "hourglass" appears when the tester is processing your entries.-#

While the hourglass is displayed, you can make no further entries. Wait until the pointer returns to the form of an arrow.

Page 58: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50514-6 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Navigation bar (9) The navigation bar is in the lower portion of the mask. You can call up help and service functions with the buttons in this bar. Every click of the button changes the work window. There are a maximum of seven different buttons on the naviga-tion bar. The number of buttons depends on the mask and the current status.

Fig. 4-2 Overview of buttons on navigation bar (example)

You can place your finger on the button on the screen for the tester to execute the desired command.

The buttons on the navigation bar have the following functions when active:

HelpPrintGo toVehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments

Table 4-3 Functions of the navigation bar

Button Function

With the "Back" button you can cancel an ongoing function or return to the previous mask. -#

Switch "Test Instruments" mode.-#

Switch to "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" mode.-#

Switch to "Guided Fault Finding" mode, if you activated "Test Instruments" or "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" mode from there.-#

This button is used for quick switching between several masks or for switching to masks that are permissible but cannot be selected directly with their own button on the navigation bar. You also can cancel or exit an ongoing function.

-#

Select various print functions from a selection list in a pull-up menu.-#

Access the tester’s help function.-#

Choose the "Continue" button to move the next mask.-#

Test Instruments

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Guided fault finding

Go to

Print

Help

Page 59: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50514-7C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Slide control You can change settings steplessly with the slide control.

Fig. 4-3 Slide control

Touch the light-colored control button and pull it slowly to the right or left depending on whether you want the value to increase or decrease.

When you touch the slide bar to the left or right of the control, the value increases or decreases by 1.

4.2.2 Using the Virtual Keyboard

The VAS 5051 tester does not have a conventional keyboard. If text entries are necessary, a so-called "virtual keyboard" appears on the touchscreen, which you can operate via the individual buttons.

The virtual keyboard consists of an input box offering various buttons and a dis-play box above the input box in which the text you enter is displayed.

The tester has two kinds of keyboard: an alphanumeric keyboard (fig. 4-4 and fig. 4-5) and a numeric keyboard (fig. 4-6).

.

The tester cannot be operated with an externally connected keyboard. The PS/2 keyboard port (see fig. 2-4) is used only for servicing by the vendors.

Page 60: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50514-8 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Alphanumeric keyboard

When the alphanumeric keyboard appears on the screen you can enter numbers, special characters and letters. You can read the entry in the gray box above the keyboard.

To enter text or a number sequence, press the desired keys one after the other.

Fig. 4-4 Alphanumeric keyboard (lowercase)

Fig. 4-5 Alphanumeric keyboard (uppercase)

.

A sound will signal if the text or number sequence is too long.

Page 61: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50514-9C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Special keys The alphanumeric keyboard has special keys that are recognizable by their lighter background. They have the following functions.

You can use this button to clear and correct your input. If you choose "C" for "Clear", the last entered character is deleted. If you use this button repeatedly, the characters are cleared backwards as long as there are still characters left to clear.

The "Q" button signifies Quit. Use this button to confirm and terminate your input.

The "SH" (Shift) button corresponds to the Shift key on your keyboard. When you press the button, the virtual keyboard display switches from uppercase letters with special characters to lowercase letters with numbers or vice versa (see fig. 4-4, fig. 4-5). This button appears only in the alphanumeric keyboard.

The button with the label "CR" (Carriage Return) corresponds to the return key on a normal keyboard. It appears only when you choose "SH" on the alphanu-meric keyboard. By choosing "CR" you can enter more text on a second line. The information window at the left shows the possible number of lines.

This button is needed to insert a blank space between words or letters.

Page 62: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50514-10 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Numeric keyboard Enter the desired value by touching the numbers. The entered numbers are dis-played in the gray field above.

Fig. 4-6 Numeric keyboard

Special keys The numeric keyboard contains the special keys "C" and "Q". Their functions correspond to those on the alphanumeric keyboard.

Page 63: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50514-11C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

4.3 Workshop Trolley

Mobility The workshop trolley allows for mobile use of the tester in the workshop. It has four wheels so that it can be easily moved around the work environment.

To fix the workshop trolley in place, the two front wheels have brakes. Use the brakes in order to avoid movement of the workshop trolley during use.

If you want to move the workshop trolley, release the brakes. You can push or pull the trolley with its all-round handle bar (ram protection bar), then reset the brakes.

If you need to move location, you can disconnect the power cord from the tester while it is still on (the tester temporarily switches to battery backup) and recon-nect the mains power at the new work location.

To remove the tester from the workshop trolley:

1. Disconnect the power to the workshop trolley (also while still switched on).

2. Unplug the power connection and remove all measuring leads.

3. With one hand raise the retainer, and with the other lift the tester out of its position.

Re-install the tester in reverse order.

Storage You can place the measuring leads and sensors on both sides of the workshop trolley on the holders provided. You can roll up longer cables, such as the 5 m diagnostic cables, on the cable reels on the sides.

During operation you can fold the dust protection cover for the VAS 5051 and store it in the drawer. The drawer also provides room for the operating manual and up to 3 CDs.

.

When the VAS 5051 is not in use, the dust protection cover should be always be placed over the workshop trolley.

Page 64: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50514-12 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Tester mounting When shipped, the tester is in its installation position and is held in place by a spring catch on its top.

You can change the tilt angle of the tester on its mounting by holding onto it at the top and bottom and swiveling it in the vertical. In this way you can work ergonomically with the VAS 5051 in varying positions.

Using the tester wit-hout the work-shop trolley

The tester is designed to be used on the workshop trolley with which it is shipped. If the tester needs be used on test drives, the following points should be noted:

Direct power con-nection of the tester

Place the separate power cable in the power socket of the tester (see fig. 2-4) and connect it to your workshop power source.

+

Attach the tester securely on the vehicle’s back seat with a strap and connect it to the vehicle by the 3 meter diagnostic cable or the 3 meter combo diagnostic cable. A second person must sit on the back seat to operate the tester.

.

The tester can be powered from the vehicle’s electrical system only via the 3 meter diagnostic cable and the 3 meter combo diagnostic cable.

Page 65: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50514-13C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

4.4 Measuring Leads

Fig. 4-7 Correct handling of a plug on the tester

+

When disconnecting, only touch the connector housings. Never pull directly on the cable as this could lead to damage.

Colored spout matches color-coded socket

Red lead pointpoints forward

.

To remove a plug from the tester, pull up the plug’s guard cover to withdraw it from the socket. The plugs are not threaded, and forceful turning may cause damage (see fig. 4-7).

The plug sheath and the corresponding socket on the tester are marked in the same color.

Page 66: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50514-14 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

U/R/D measuring lead and COM measuring lead

On the tester, connect the COM measuring lead to the socket labeled "COM" (marked in black).

For voltage measurement, plug the 4 mm banana plug of the 3-pin connector of the U/R/D measuring lead into the red "U/R/D" socket.

Fig. 4-8 Voltage measurement, plug in position "U/R/D"

For current measurement, turn the 3-pin connector through 180 degrees and plug the 4 mm banana plug into the red "10 A" socket.

Fig. 4-9 Current measurement, plug in position "10 A"

+

After an inline current measurement, whenever possible refit the connector immediately to the "U/R/D" position! If it is accidentally still fitted at the "10 A" position in a subsequent voltage measurement, the internal fuse will be destroyed (for details on changing the fuse refer to section 12.2.5).

Page 67: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50514-15C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

DSO measuring leads (DSO1 and DSO2)

On the tester, place the lead on one of the blue-marked sockets labeled "DSO1" or "DSO2". You also can use the "DSO1" terminal as a second channel for the multimeter.

Fig. 4-10 DSO measuring lead connection to the tester

Current pick-up 50 A Connect the cable to the socket labeled "SZ" (marked yellow).

Fig. 4-11 Connection of current pick-up 50 A

Current pick-up500 A

Connect the cable to the socket labeled "SZ" (marked yellow).

The test result is dependent on direction. If the direction arrow is pointing to the positive pole the technical current direction is displayed as the test result.

Page 68: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50514-16 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Trigger pick-up Connect the cable to the socket labeled "TZ" (marked black).

Fig. 4-12 Connection of trigger pick-up

kV pick-up Connect the cable to the socket labeled "kV" (marked red).

Fig. 4-13 Connection of kV pick-up

Page 69: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50514-17C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Diagnostic cable/combo diagnostic cable

Connect the connection plug of the cable to the socket labeled "DIAG" (marked black).

Fig. 4-14 Connection of diagnostic cable

Diagnostic adapter Plug the diagnostic cable or combo diagnostic cable plug into the 16-pin diagnos-tic coupling.

Fig. 4-15 Connection of diagnostic adapter

Diagnostic cable LT Use of the diagnostic cable LT is the same as for the 3 meter and 5 meter diagno-stic cables.

Page 70: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50514-18 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

4.5 Printer

Button panel The printer is preset at the factory. Use of the button panel is normally necessary only after replacing the image drum unit (see section 12.5.2). You can find a list-ing of factory settings in section 12.5.7.

Fig. 4-16 Button panel

.

Modify the printer settings only if the defaults have been changed. Otherwise you may get no printout, or the printout may be faulty.

OL 610e Pe rsona l Page Pr in te r

OKI

A4 OTHER ENVB5A5 LTR

Page 71: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

Operating Manual VAS 50514-19C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Inserting paper & !2&"#$!

Fig. 4-17 Releasing the paper cassette

Fig. 4-18 Side (top) and back (bottom) paper feed

1. Press the curved handle on the cassette inwards slightly. The cassette is un-locked. Remove the cassette completely from the housing (see fig. 4-17).

2. Place the paper in the cassette. Notice the PAPER FULL marking on the sides (see fig. 4-18) and do not insert more paper than indicated by the marking.

Ebene 1R

OL 600e

Page 72: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50514-20 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operation

3. Set the side and back paper feed so that there is about a half millimeter space. Tip the back feed slightly forward to move it.

4. Push the paper cassette into the printer until it engages.

Extending thepaper tray

You can increase the size of the paper tray by extending the front. A metal frame piece can be opened out (see fig. 4-19).

Fig. 4-19 Extending the paper tray

Switching the printer off

The printer always is on.

Page 73: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

Operating Manual VAS 50515-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

5 Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

5.1 Overview

In the "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" operating mode you can communicate with the vehicle systems on the diagnostic bus when the connected diagnostic cable is connected and the ignition on. You can select the desired vehicle system from dialog masks. From the masks you can start the possible diagnostic functions for the vehicle system concerned and, for example, retrieve test results or execute a final control diagnosis, etc.

To work with vehicle self-diagnosis you need the relevant Workshop Manual.

If you select a vehicle system that is not fitted in the connected vehicle you receive the following message:

Vehicle system not available.

You also receive a message if you select a diagnostic function that is unknown to the vehicle system or if the function cannot currently be executed:

Function not recognized or not currently executable.

Switch You can switch to the following operating modes in the vehicle self-diagnosis masks using the buttons on the navigation bar:

• Test Instruments and

• Guided fault finding (only if you previously switched from guided fault fin-ding to vehicle self-diagnosis).

Go to An operating mode can be cancelled or terminated with the Go to function.

Print When you select the "Print" button, you can choose various printout options from a pull-up menu:

• Screen: A screen print that outputs what you see on-screen to the printer.

• Save result: The tester saves the current result in the self-diagnosis log. If the log already contains data, the first time you execute "Save result" after prin-ting out the self-diagnosis log a query appears asking whether you want to de-lete the saved data. Press the "Erase" button to overwrite the old data; press "Do not erase" to append the new data to the old. The self-diagnosis log is retained when the tester is switched off, unless it is explicitly erased.

• Self-diagnosis log: This selection is only displayed if results have been saved beforehand. The tester outputs the saved results to a connected printer.

Page 74: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50515-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

5.2 Start Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

The "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" operating mode is activated from the start mask by choosing the "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" button (see fig. 5-1).

Fig. 5-1 Start mask, activating "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis"

When you choose this button in the start mask, the tester offers a list of all known vehicle systems (see fig. 5-2), whether or not they are fitted in the vehicle being diagnosed.

Vehicle-self-diagnosis is designed for KW1281, KW2000, OBDII and LT vehi-cles. KW1281 and KW2000 use largely identical masks. The VAS 5051 automat-ically detects whether a control unit is working to KW1281 or KW2000.

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments

Help

Administration

Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information SystemVersion - GB - / V01.00 24/12/1999

VAS 5051

Guided fault finding

Applications

Print

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Page 75: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

Operating Manual VAS 50515-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

5.3 Select Vehicle System

When you select the "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" button in the start mask (see fig. 5-1), the following mask appears. It contains a list of all installed vehicle systems and tester-specific functions.

The vehicle systems list is separated from the functions list by an empty line (see fig. 5-3). Another empty line separates the functions from the list of LT2 vehicle systems.

Fig. 5-2 "Select vehicle system" mask, Start of list

You can select any vehicle system or function with the selection bar. As soon as you select a vehicle system, communication over the diagnostic bus begins. The process is indicated in the left-side information window by the "Communication setup" text.

When the communication is set up, the control unit identification is read and dis-played permanently in the right-side information window (see section 5.4).

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments Go to HelpPrint

Select vehicle system

01 - Engine electronics41 - Diesel pump electronics02 - Gearbox electronics12 - Clutch electronics22 - All-wheel drive electronics03 - Brake system electronics14 - Suspension electronics24 - Traction control system34 - Self-levelling suspension15 - Airbag25 - Immobiliser35 - Central locking45 - Interior monitoring55 - Headlight range control

Page 76: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50515-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

If you move to the end of the list with the scroll bar, you will find additional func-tions:

• 33 - OBDII (US vehicles)The OBDII functions are available for communication with vehicle systems that support the "SAE J1979: 1991-12 E/E Diagnostic Test Modes" standard and react to the address 33H. A selection of masks for OBDII functions is co-vered in section 5.5.

• 00- Interrogate fault memory - Vehicle systemThe fault memories for all vehicle systems entered in the "Select vehicle sy-stem" mask are read, where available, and their contents with the number of stored faults displayed in a subsequent mask.

• Select vehicle system via address wordIf the vehicle system you are looking for is not in the selection list, you can enter the relevant address word by way of a keyboard which appears on-screen. When you acknowledge the entered address, communication with the addressed vehicle system is set up.

• LT2 vehicle systemsThe vehicle systems of the Light Transporter 2 are offered for selection. In LT2 vehicle systems only the LT functions or (in US tester versions) the OB-DII functions are usable.

Fig. 5-3 "Select vehicle system" mask, end of list

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments Go to HelpPrint

Select vehicle system

09 - Electronic extras

93 - OBDII00 - Interrogate fault memory - Entire systemSelect vehicle system via address word

01 - LT diesel control25 - LT immobilizer81 - LT engine management system82 - LT ABS83 - LT tachograph84 - LT auxiliary heater87 - LT airbag/belt tensioners89 - LT dash panel insert

Page 77: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

Operating Manual VAS 50515-5C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

5.4 Select Diagnostic Function

The following mask (see fig. 5-4) is displayed if you selected a vehicle system in the previous mask and the communication via the diagnostic bus was successful.

The mask displays a selection of diagnostic functions (jobs) matching the vehicle system at the left and the control unit identification read from the vehicle system at the top right in the header. If a vehicle system comprises several control units, their identification data are displayed beforehand in a separate mask.

In general, the list of diagnostic functions a specific vehicle system type,e.g. "01 - Engine electronics", does not change, even if individual ones do not occur in a particular vehicle system.

Other functions, such as "20 - Read RAM" etc., are only accessible to authorized personnel with a key CD (see also section 9.9).

Fig. 5-4 Select diagnostic function

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments Go to HelpPrint

Select diagnostic function

01 - Engine electronics028906021EG1.9l R4 EDC 00SG 0819Code 2Workshop code 5314

02 - Interrogate fault memory03 - Final control diagnosis04 - Basic setting05 - Erase fault memory15 - Readiness code06 - End output07 - Code control unit08 - Read data block09 - Read individual measured value10 - Adaption11 - Login procedureUpdate programming

.

Selected examples for the diagnostic functions are described further on in the text.

Page 78: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50515-6 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

Diagnostic function not available

If you select a function that is not available in the selected vehicle system, the tester responds by delivering the following message in the left-side information window:

Function not recognized or not currently executable.

Diagnostic busfaulty

If you receive a fault signal indicating Diagnostic bus faulty instead of the mask shown above, the diagnostic cable could be faulty, the ignition could be off or the battery voltage could be low. Remedy the cause and repeat the function.

End Communication Communication with the vehicle system continues until you select the diagnostic function "End output" in the "Select diagnostic function" mask or click the "Back" button.

5.4.1 "Interrogate Fault Memory" Diagnostic Function

When you select "02 - Interrogate fault memory" in the "Select diagnostic func-tion" mask (see fig. 5-4), the number of faults and the contents of the fault mem-ory are read from the displayed vehicle system. The fault number is displayed on-screen in plain text.

Fig. 5-5 "Interrogate fault memory" mask

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments Go to HelpPrint

1 fault(s) detected

Interrogate fault memory

00542 Needle lift sender - G80Open circuit/short to positive

01 - Engine electronics028906021EG1.9l R4 EDC 00SG 0819Code 2Workshop code 5314

Page 79: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

Operating Manual VAS 50515-7C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

The number of faults found in the memory is shown in the left-side information window. All saved items of fault information are displayed in the work window. The information consists of a five-part fault ID number and the associated text. If the fault occurs sporadically, this will be indicated on an extra line.

If the memory contains more faults than the screen can display, the tester offers a scroll bar at the far right side with which you can move the list up or down.

For KW2000 you can click on the "Continue" button to view the ambient conditi-ons under which the fault occurred.

5.4.2 "Final Control Diagnosis" Diagnostic Function

When you select the "03 - Final control diagnosis" function in the "Select diag-nostic function" mask (see fig. 5-4), the tester activates the initial final control element. In the lower left-side information window, the note "1st final control being tested" appears.

In some cases, the process can be observed visually (e.g. indicator lamps) or acoustically (e.g. relays).

Switching from vehicle self-diagnosis into the test instruments allows you to monitor the activated final control element and its results with the multimeter or oscilloscope, for example.

Fig. 5-6 "Final control diagnosis" mask

You can call up and display the next final control element by choosing the "Con-tinue" button. Final control diagnosis is canceled with the "Back" button.

In certain cases, when processing the final control diagnosis certain actions are re-quired in the vehicle or on final control elements. You can find further information about this in the Workshop Manual.

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments Go to HelpPrint

4. final control being tested

Final control diagnosis

Commencement of injection valve - N108Exhaust gas recirculation valve - N18Air conditioner compressor interventionFuel shut-off valve - N109

01 - Engine electronics028906021EG1.9l R4 EDC 00SG 0819Code 2Workshop code 5314

Engine speed (Idling speed)

Engine control unit voltage supply

Coolant temperature

Intake air temperature

860 /min12.23 V 92 °C 22.4 °C

Page 80: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50515-8 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

5.4.3 "Erase Fault Memory" Diagnostic Function

The "05 - Erase fault memory" job deletes the fault memories of the selected vehicle system. When you call up the function, the tester shows a dialog box with the following prompt:

Execute function?Note: Data will be deleted.

Press the "Cancel" button if you mistakenly activated the function or the "OK" button to irretrievably delete the data.

The job is confirmed in the left-side information window:

Fault memory erased

The "Erase fault memory" function automatically follows the "Interrogate fault memory" function. This means that if the fault has not been rectified in the vehi-cle, causing the fault code still to be detected and stored in the vehicle system, the contents of the fault memory are again displayed by the tester. The left-side infor-mation window then shows:

Fault memory erased1 fault(s) detected

The fault information is additionally displayed in the workspace.

5.4.4 End Output

When you want to exit vehicle self-diagnosis for the selected vehicle system, select the "06 - End output" function in the "Select diagnostic function" mask (see fig. 5-4) or choose the "Back" button.

The program returns to the "Select vehicle system" mask. There you can terminate "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" mode by selecting "Exit" from the menu and you will re-turn to the start mask.

.

You can erase the fault memory only if you previously read it via the "Interro-gate fault memory" function (see section 5.4.1). This prevents important infor-mation on faults being lost.

Page 81: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

Operating Manual VAS 50515-9C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

5.4.5 "Read Data Block" Diagnostic Function

When you select "08 - Read data block" in the "Select diagnostic function" mask (see fig. 5-4), you can read and cyclically display a data block from the vehicle system. Enter the desired display group ("Display group No." in the Workshop Manual) to get the relevant measured values.

Fig. 5-7 -#"Read data block" mask

The default display is of the display groups from 1 upward with measured values #1 to #4 (display fields 1 to 4, if available), including their meanings and (with KW2000) physical units. You can change the number of the display group with the "Up arrow" or "Down arrow" buttons.

When you choose the "Basic setting" button in the mask displayed in fig. 5-7, the values for the basic setting belonging to measured values #1 to #4 are shown.

Read data block

Basic setting

Displaygroup

860 /min 1.08 ms1.520 ° 8.3 ° BTDC

860 /min 1.08 ms1.520 ° 8.3 ° BTDC

Read data block

Basic setting 1

Vehicle self-diagnosis08 - Read data block

Test Instruments Go to HelpPrint

Engine speed (idling speed)

Engine charge

Throttle valve angle

Ignition angle

Engine speed (idling speed)

Engine charge

Throttle valve angle

Ignition angle

01 - Engine electronics028906021EG1.9l R4 EDC 00SG 0819Code 2Workshop code 5314

Page 82: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50515-10 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

5.4.6 "Adaption" Diagnostic Function

When you want to check the behavior of the vehicle system described in the Workshop Manual, you can read, test and save adaption values in the "10 - Adaption" diagnostic function.

First select the channel number on the on-screen numeric keyboard. The tester reads and displays the current adaption value. Whether the tester shows test val-ues in the work window depends on the vehicle system and the selected channel number.

You can change adaption values using a virtual keyboard (choose the "Keyboard" button) or with the slide control. If you push the slide control all the way to the right, the pre-set value range doubles, e.g. from 8 to 16, etc.

Fig. 5-8 "Adaption" mask

.

For especially critical adaption values, you must send an ID number to the con-trol unit via the "Login procedure" function for the control unit to enable the coding. Use the on-screen numeric keyboard for this.

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments Go to Help

Save

Print

Channel 3read and test

10 - Adaption01 - Engine electronics028906021EG1.9l R4 EDC 00SG 0819Code 2Workshop code 5314

Engine speed (Idling speed)

Engine control unit voltage supply

Coolant temperature

Intake air temperature

860 /min12.23 V 92 °C 22.4 °C

Page 83: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

Operating Manual VAS 50515-11C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Choose the "Save" button when the correct adaption value is found. The tester initially shows the old and new adaption values; the new value is saved in the vehicle system only when you choose the "Accept" button.

Erase learnt values By selecting the channel number "0", you can erase all learned values saved in the vehicle system. The tester responds in the left-side information field with the query:

Channel 0Erase learnt values?

Choose the "Continue" button to erase the saved values or the "Back" button to cancel the function and return to the "Select diagnostic function" (fig. 5-4) mask. When the values have been deleted the tester confirms the fact in the left-side in-formation window.

5.4.7 "Update Programming" Function

With the "Update programming" diagnostic function (fig. 5-4) you can update the vehicle system’s program status with the VAS 5051.

Select diagnostic function

This diagnostic function option appears only if update programming can be per-formed with this vehicle system and there is a more up-to-date version of the pro-gram in the tester. When you have successfully completed update programming for a vehicle system, the diagnostic function for it is no longer offered.

You can start the diagnostic function by choosing "Update programming". If the necessary conditions are not met in the vehicle system, a warning appears. Estab-lish the necessary conditions indicated and restart update programming.

The process is dialog-guided, across several different masks:

• An information text showing the new version number appears. Follow the prompt it gives.

• The new update program is loaded into the vehicle system. This operation takes several minutes. Its progress is shown continuously by a progress bar; on completion the programming log information appears on-screen.

• Switch the ignition off and back on again.

• The fault memories of all vehicle systems are erased.

If a fault occurs in the process, the vehicle system is no longer ready for service. The fault is displayed, and the diagnostic functions selection (fig. 5-4) shows only the "Update programming" function. Repeat update pro-gramming.

Page 84: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50515-12 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

Self-diagnosis log During the operation you can record the results in the self-diagnosis log. Of spe-cial interest is the programming log information showing the vehicle version before and after update programming and the programming status.

Help Once you have selected the diagnostic function you can get more assistance by choosing the "Help" function.

5.5 OBDII (US Vehicles)

When you select "OBDII" in the "Select vehicle system" mask (see fig. 5-3), the following mask appears. You can choose between the OBDII oper-ating modes 1 to 7.

In the OBDII masks, all vehicle systems that support the OBDII standard are dis-played at once in the right-side information window. Distinctions are made by different character colors, relating to the designation of the vehicle system, jobs and results.

Fig. 5-9 OBDII, "Select diagnosis mode" mask

• Diagnosis mode 1: Obtain data: You have the option to obtain information such as analog inputs and outputs, binary inputs and outputs as well as system status information.

• Diagnosis mode 2: Obtain operating conditions: During the first occurrence of malfunctions in a subsystem, the current conditions in the vehicle system must be saved in addition to the fault registration. You can read these condi-tions and make a decision regarding further procedures for repair.

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments Guided fault finding

Go to HelpPrint

Selectdiagnosis mode

OBDII

Mode 1: Obtain dataMode 2: Obtain operating conditionsMode 3: Interrogate fault memoryMode 4: Reset/erase diagnosis dataMode 5: Obtain lambda test resultsMode 6: Obtain test results on not continuously monitored componentsMode 7: Obtain test results on continuously monitored componentsMode 8: Tank leak test

Page 85: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

Operating Manual VAS 50515-13C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

• Diagnosis mode 3: Interrogate fault memory: You can read and display all sa-ved fault codes for all vehicle systems.

• Diagnosis mode 4: Reset/erase diagnosis data: You can erase or delete emis-sions-related information in the vehicle system. Erasing refers to:- erasing the number of fault codes- erasing the fault codes- erasing the fault codes for "Freeze Frame Data"- erasing "Lambda probe monitoring values"- resetting the monitoring status- manufacturer-specific information

Data can be erased only if the fault memory was read previously (diagnosis mode 3).

• Diagnosis mode 5: Obtain Lambda test resultsYou can display the results of the vehicle-specific Lambda probe monitoring.

• Diagnosis mode 6: Obtain test results on not continuously monitored com-ponents: You can display the test results of components not monitored conti-nuously.

• Diagnosis mode 7: Obtain test results on continuously monitored compon-ents: You can display test results of continuously monitored components.

Example of mask sequence, mode 1: Obtain data:

Fig. 5-10 OBDII, "Select data" mask

In the mask shown above, you can select data that you would like to read from the vehicle system.

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments Guided fault finding

Go to HelpPrint

Select data

OBDII Mode 1 Engine electronics

Gearbox electronics

PID 01:

PID 04: Calculated load value

PID 06: Short term fuel trim - Bank 1

PID 12: Engine RPMPID 13: Vehicle speedPID 14: Ignition timing advance for #1 cylinderPID 15: Intake air temperaturePID 16: Air flow rate from MAF sensorPID 17: Absolute throttle positionPID 18: Command secondary air statusPID 19: Location of oxygen Bank 1 to Bank 2 - Sonde 1 to Sonde 4 (p

PID 03: Fuel system status

PID 05: Engine coolant temperature

PID 07: Long term fuel trim - Bank 1

Page 86: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50515-14 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Vehicle Self-Diagnosis

The following mask (see fig. 5-11) shows the results; the link between measure-ment results and vehicle systems is made with colored characters.

Fig. 5-11 OBDII, "Display data" mask

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments Guided fault finding

Go to HelpPrint

Display data

OBDII Mode 1 Engine electronics

Gearbox electronics

PID 03: Fuel system status Fuel system 1 status - Open loop - has not yet satisfied conditions to go closed loop Fuel system 2 status - Not used

PID 05: Engine coolant temperature -40 C

PID 05: Engine coolant temperature 0 C

PID 07: Long term fuel trim - Bank 1 0.00%

Page 87: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

6 Test Instruments

6.1 Overview

The "Test Instruments" mode allows you to set the testing unit with the help of parameter masks and then use the unit to perform tests. Test results are displayed on-screen numerically or graphically.

The following functions are available in "Test Instruments" mode:

• Multimeter

• DSO

In addition, you can also use the buttons on the navigation bar to switch to the

• Vehicle self-diagnosis and

• Guided fault finding

modes. You can only do this if you began your diagnostic session in one of these modes.

Print measured values

By pressing on the "Print" button then selecting "Screen", you can print a copy of the screen and so get a printout of the measured values. Before starting the print, press the "Freeze frame" button to freeze the cyclically displayed measured val-ues.

+

Use the test instruments only on vehicles and vehicle components.

Page 88: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

6.2 Starting the Test Instruments

The test instruments are accessed from the start mask by pressing the "Test Instruments" button.

Fig. 6-1 "System start" mask, "Test Instruments" selected

The "Multimeter" mask always appears when it is started.

Free use The test instruments can be used without pre-identification of the vehicle, either by way of the start mask (see above) or by pressing the "Test Instruments" button in "Guided Fault Finding" or "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" mode.

When you start the test instruments from the start mask, the "Multimeter" mask always appears. When switching from the "Guided Fault Finding" or "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" mode, the mask that was used most recently appears (multimeter or DSO).

In the "DSO" mask, press the "Multimeter" button to select the multimeter func-tions.

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments

Help

Administration

Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information SystemVersion - GB - / V01.00 24/12/1999

VAS 5051

Guided fault finding

Applications

Print

Test Instruments

Test Instruments

Page 89: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

6.3 Multimeter

Setting themultimeter

The first time the "Multimeter" mask is entered, it opens in its basic setting "Volt-age U/R/D" (see fig. 6-2). From then on, when it is opened the settings that were in place the last time the mode was used remain in force.

Once the mask appears, the current setting is used to perform a calibration.

Fig. 6-2 "Multimeter" mask, basic setting

The "Multimeter" mask is used to operate the multimeter as a free measuring device. You can set measurement functions, perform measurements and read the test results in it.

Test InstrumentsMultimeter

Voltage U/R/D

Go to Help

DSO

Print

Continuity test U/R/D

Diode test U/R/D

Current 50 A current pick-up

MinimumMaximum

Resistance U/R/D

Freeze frame

Inline current

Voltage U/R/D

2V

Current 500 A current pick-up

Voltage DSO 1

Calibrate

Function block 2

Function block 1

Page 90: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Function blocks The selectable measurement functions are divided into two function blocks (see fig. 6-2):

• Function Block 1 (measurements via U/R/D measuring lead).

− Voltage

− Inline current

− Resistance

− Diode test

− Continuity test

• Function block 2 (measurement via current pick-ups, DSO1)

− Current, 50 A current pick-up

− Current, 500 A current pick-up

− Voltage, DSO1

On the screen the buttons which can be used to select the measurement functions in the two function blocks are shown in differing font colors.

Two simultaneous measurements

You can perform one measurement from function block 1 or function block 2 or you can perform one from each of the function blocks simultaneously (for exam-ple see fig. 6-9).

Each of the measurements is run as if it were the only measurement being per-formed.

In order to display both sets of measured values, the display box is split in two. The first measured value is displayed on the left, the second on the right parallel to it. Both are displayed cyclically.

Bar display The measured value bar and the min/max display are not shown as long as two measurements are being performed at the same time.

Calibration An automatic self-calibration feature is built in to the multimeter functions. It is performed the first time the corresponding button is activated. If you switch measurement types, it will also calibrate in the new measurement type.

This calibration will also take place when you return to the "Test Instruments" mode if has been more than an hour since the last switch.

You can also perform the calibration manually if necessary (see "Calibrate" but-ton, section 6.3.8).

Page 91: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-5C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

6.3.1 Direct and Alternating Voltage Measurement

Press on the "Voltage U/R/D" button to select the "Voltage measurement" mea-surement function.

Function block 2 Stop the measurement function selected in function block 2 when necessary.

Press the "=" button to select the "Direct voltage" measurement type.

Press the "~" button to select the "Alternating voltage" measurement type.

Press the display box for the measurement range to switch from automatic to manual measurement range selection. You can reactivate automatic measurement selection by pressing on the display box a second time.

Press this button to set the higher of the two measurement ranges when selecting measurement ranges manually.

Press this button to set the lower of the two measurement ranges when selecting measurement ranges manually.

The colors of the triangles on the measurement selection buttons indicate their status:

• Yellow triangle ⇒ Measurement range changes possible

• Black triangle ⇒ Disabled

Press the "Freeze frame" mask to "freeze" the measured value display.

Cyclical repetition of the measurement stops and the last display is frozen.

Press the "Freeze frame" button again.

Cyclical repetition of the measurement restarts and the display is updated on a continuous basis.

Voltage U/R/D

Freeze frame

Page 92: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-6 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Freeze frame remote control

Press the button on the end of the measuring lead test probe to start the "Freeze frame" feature by remote control when measuring a vehicle.

Press the "Minimum Maximum" button to start the "Extreme values" function.

The "Extreme values" function calculates the current minimum and maximum values from the measured values displayed and shows them both in the measured values bar in the form of two vertical lines. These extreme value lines represent the fluctuation range of the measured values.

The values calculated for the minimum and maximum measured value are dis-played below the lines.

Fig. 6-3 "Multimeter" mask, voltage measurement

Test InstrumentsMultimeter

Voltage U/R/D

MinimumMaximum

Freeze frame

Go to Help

DSO

Print

Continuity test U/R/D

Diode testU/R/D

ResistanceU/R/D

Inline current

Voltage U/R/D

20V

Current 50 A current pick-up

Current 500 A current pick-up

Voltage DSO 1

Calibrate

Page 93: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-7C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

6.3.2 Direct and Alternating Current Measurement

Press the "Inline current" button to select the "Current measurement" measure-ment feature.

Function block 2 Stop the measurement function selected in function block 2 when necessary.

Press the display box for the measurement range to switch from automatic to manual measurement range selection. You can reactivate automatic measurement selection by pressing on the display box a second time.

The rest of the mask is the same as the direct and alternating voltage measure-ment masks (see section 6.3.1).

Fig. 6-4 "Multimeter" mask, current measurement

Inline current

5 A

Test InstrumentsMultimeter

Inline current

Continuity testU/R/D

Diode test U/R/D

MinimumMaximum

Resistance U/R/D

Freeze frame

Inline current

Voltage U/R/D

Go to Help

DSO

Print

1A

Current 50 A current pick-up

Current 50 A current pick-up

Voltage DSO 1

Calibrate

Page 94: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-8 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

6.3.3 Direct and Alternating Current Measurement via Current Pick-up

Press the "Current 50 A current pick-up" or "Current 500 A current pick-up" but-ton to select the "Current measurement" feature.

Function block 1 Stop the measurement function selected in function block 1 when necessary.

Press the display box for the measurement range to switch from automatic to manual measurement range selection. You can reactivate automatic measurement selection by pressing on the display box a second time.

The rest of the mask is the same as the direct and alternating voltage measure-ment masks (see section 6.3.1).

Fig. 6-5 "Multimeter" mask, current measurement with current pick-up

Current 50 A current pick-up

Current 500 A current pick-up

5 A

Test InstrumentsMultimeter

MinimumMaximum

Freeze frame

1A

Go to Help

DSO

Print

5A

Continuity test U/R/D

Diode test U/R/D

Resistance U/R/D

Inline current

Voltage U/R/D

Current 500 A current pick-up

Voltage DSO 1

CalibrateCurrent 50 A current pick-up

Current 50 A current pick-up

Page 95: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-9C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

6.3.4 Resistance Measurement

Press the "Resistance U/R/D" button to select the "Resistance measurement" function.

Function block 2 Stop the measurement function selected in function block 2 when necessary.

Press the display box for the measurement range to switch from automatic to manual measurement range selection. You can reactivate automatic measurement selection by pressing on the display box a second time.

Press this button to set the higher of the two measurement ranges when selecting measurement ranges manually.

Press this button to set the lower of the two measurement ranges when selecting measurement ranges manually.

Fig. 6-6 "Multimeter" mask, resistance measurement

Resistance U/R/D

0 .. 10 MOhm

Test InstrumentsMultimeter

Resistance U/R/D

Go to Help

DSO

Print

Continuity test U/R/D

DiodenprüfungURDDiode test U/R/D

ResistanceU/R/D

Inline current

Voltage U/R/D

StandbildFreeze frame

Current 50 A current pick-up

Current 500 A current pick-up

VoltageDSO1

Calibrate

0..100Ohm

MaximumMinimum

Page 96: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-10 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

When the 0...100 Ohm measurement range is selected, the calibration for this measurement range is started. A series of dialog boxes prompt you to take the necessary actions.

The colors of the triangles on the measurement selection buttons indicate their status:

• Yellow triangle ⇒ Measurement range changes possible

• Black triangle ⇒ Disabled

Use of the "=" and "~" buttons is disabled.

The rest of the mask is the same as the constant and alternating voltage measure-ment masks (see section 6.3.1).

6.3.5 Continuity Test

Press the "Continuity test U/R/D" button to select the "Continuity test" measure-ment function. It indicates a connection or an open line.

Function block 2 Stop the measurement function selected in function block 2 when necessary.

Fig. 6-7 "Multimeter" mask, continuity test, connection

Continuity test U/R/D

MultimeterContinuity test U/R/D

Continuity testU/R/D

Inline current

0 .. 10 Ohm

Go to Help

DSO

Print

Freeze frame

Diode test U/R/D

Resistance U/R/D

Voltage U/R/D

Current 50 Acurrent pick-up

Current 500 A current pick-up

Voltage DSO 1

Calibrate

Test Instruments

Page 97: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-11C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Press the "Freeze frame" button.

Cyclical repetition of the measurement stops and the last display is frozen.

Press the "Freeze frame" button again.

Cyclical repetition of the measurement restarts and the display is updated on a continuous basis.

Freeze frame remote control

Press the button on the end of the measuring lead test probe to start the "Freeze frame" feature by remote control.

Use of the "=" and "~" buttons is disabled.

Display The results of the continuity test are shown in graphical form:

• Open switch symbol ⇒ Interruption

• Closed switch symbol ⇒ Connection

When the closed switch symbol is displayed, a signal tone is also heard.

6.3.6 Diode Test

Press the "Diode test U/R/D" button to select the "Diode test" measurement func-tion.

Function block 2 Stop the measurement function selected in function block 2 when necessary.

Press the "Freeze frame" button.

Cyclical repetition of the measurement stops and the last display is frozen.

Press the "Freeze frame" button again.

Cyclical repetition of the measurement restarts and the display is updated on a continuous basis.

Freeze frame

Diode test U/R/D

Freeze frame

Page 98: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-12 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Freeze frameremote control

Press the button on the end of the measuring lead test probe to activate the "Freeze frame" button by remote control.

Use of the "=" and "~" buttons is disabled.

Fig. 6-8 "Multimeter" mask, diode test, diode in forward direction

Display The result of the diode test is displayed as a graphical symbol:

• Diode symbol from + to - ⇒ Diode in forward direction

• Diode Symbol from - to + ⇒ Diode in reverse direction

• Closed switch symbol ⇒ Short circuit

• Open switch symbol ⇒ Open circuit

6.3.7 Voltage DSO1

With the "Voltage DSO1" function you have an expanded measurable voltage range up to ± 400 V in addition to the U/R/D functions. You can use this function in combination with the measurement functions of function block 1 (fig. 6-2) to perform two measurements in parallel.

Test InstrumentsMultimeter

Diode test U/R/D

Diode test U/R/D

Continuity test U/R/D

ResistanceU/R/D

Inline current

Voltage U/R/D

Go to Help

DSO

Print

Freeze frame

Current 50 A current pick-up

Current 500 A current pick-up

Voltage DSO 1

Calibrate

Page 99: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-13C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Fig. 6-9 "Multimeter" mask, voltage measurement via U/R/D and DSO1

6.3.8 Calibrate

Press the "Calibrate" button to perform a manual calibration of the test instru-ments and the attached measuring leads. Where necessary, dialog boxes guide you through the further actions.

You should always perform a manual calibration after switching the DSO mea-suring leads or moving the current pick-ups to a different position, or if you have not used the VAS 5051 for a lengthy period of time, especially if it has been exposed to extreme temperature variations.

Perform the calibration manually to compensate for additional contact resistances through to the measured object in resistance tests. Short the connections to the measured object and perform the calibration manually. The calibration will then cover not only the measuring lead but also the connections to the measured object.

Voltage U/R/DVoltage DSO 1

Go to HelpPrint

Diode test U/R/D

Current 50 A current pick-up

Resistance U/R/D

Freeze frame

Continuity test U/R/D

Inline current

Voltage U/R/D

Voltage DSO 1

Current 500 A current pick-up

Calibrate

DSO16 V20V

Test InstrumentsMultimeter

Calibrate

Page 100: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-14 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

6.4 Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO)

Starting the DSO If you are in the "Multimeter" mask, press the "DSO" button.

In "Guided fault finding" or "Vehicle self-diagnosis" mode, press the "Test Instru-ments" button and the mask used most recently in "Test Instruments" mode appears: this is either the "Multimeter" mask or the "DSO" mask.

The first time the "DSO" mask is opened, it will display the basic settings (fig. 6-10).

From then on, each time the "DSO" mask is selected the settings used the last time the mode was started remain in force.

Fig. 6-10 "DSO" mask, basic setting

The "DSO" mask allows you to use the digital storage oscilloscope as a free mea-surement device. You can set parameters, trigger measurements and read the measurement results.

You can view up to three measurement channels on-screen at once. To provide clearer assignment of the functions, the button labels, the parameters and the dis-played measurement signals are displayed in different colours:

• Channel A: yellow

• Channel B: green

• Preset measurements: blue

Test InstrumentsDSO

Auto mode

Multimeter

Go to HelpPrint

Measuring mode

Trigger mode

Channel B

Channel A

Freeze frame2 V/Div.=

2 V/Div.=

5 ms/Div.

Time/Div.Position

T

!$Measurement range, channel coupling A

Measurement range, channel coupling

Page 101: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-15C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

You can enter the following settings in the "DSO" mask:

• Select the measurement channels using the "Channel A" and "Channel B" buttons.

• Set parameters for the measurement channels (not available in Auto Setup)

• Select and set parameters for the trigger channel using the "Trigger mode" button (not visible when you are working in Draw mode).

• Select the measuring mode using the "Measuring mode" button.

• Set the time base using the arrow buttons in the "DSO" mask.

Image position and time base

If none of the buttons "Channel A", "Channel B", "Trigger mode" or "Measuring mode" has been pressed, you can select the image position and the time base.

Press this button to move the curve grid-by-grid to the right and so bring the left portion of the display box into view.

Press this button to move the curve grid-by-grid to the left and so bring the right portion of the display box into view.

By moving the curve to the right or left, you are also moving the trigger point (represented by "T").

Press this button to set the higher time base.

Press this button to set the lower time base.

.

The time base 0.01 ms/DIV may only be set for single channel operation (Chan-nel A or B OFF). The button of the deactivated channel is hidden.

The time bases 20, 50 and 100 s/DIV may only be set in Draw mode.

Page 102: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-16 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

6.4.1 Channel A, Channel B

Press the "Channel A" or "Channel B" button so that the operating functions for "Channel", "Measurement range", "Coupling" and "Default measurement" are displayed under the display box. This allows you to use them to operate the chan-nel.

In addition, a slide control appears at the right-hand margin of the display box which can be used to set the vertical shift of the displayed curve.

In a two-channel view, for example, you can position channel A in the upper por-tion of the display box and the signal curve of channel B at the bottom. This pro-vides you with a clearer screen view, specially if the signal curves do not intersect.

Fig. 6-11 "DSO" mask, Auto mode, Channel A

Press the "Channel" button to enter the test connection for the pre-set channel, e.g. "Channel A".

A pull-up menu appears with the following options:

kVDSO2DSO1OFF

The line you select is highlighted.

Channel A

Channel B

Test Instruments

DSO

Auto mode

Freeze frame2 V/Div.=

2 V/Div.=

5 ms/Div.

T 0

Channel Coupling Defaultmeasurement

Go to HelpPrint

Multimeter

Measuring mode

Trigger mode

Channel B

0.00

Channel

Page 103: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-17C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Select the desired test connection (measuring lead) and press the "Channel" but-ton again (or any other button) to accept the selection and close the menu. If you select OFF, "Channel A" is inactive.

Measurement range You can change the measurement range by one step by pressing the "Up arrow" or "Down arrow" buttons. The current measurement range, e.g. "10 /Div.", is displayed on the left of the display box (yellow - at the top - to match with channel A and green - at the bottom - to match with channel B).

Press this button to set a larger voltage range.

Press this button to set a smaller voltage range

Press the "Coupling" button to select the coupling for "Channel A".

A pull-up menu appears with the following options:

For channel kV: For channel DSO1 and DSO2:

GND GNDDC DC

AC

The line you select is highlighted.

Select the desired coupling and then press the "Coupling" button again.

• If "GND" is selected, "Channel A" is set to its reference potential (tester ground) and a flat line is displayed as the signal characteristic. In this function you can set the zero of the curve display with the slide control.

• If "DC" is selected, the direct and alternating voltage portions of the test si-gnal are represented. The pre-set DC coupling appears as a "=" symbol on the touchscreen (e.g. "2 V/Div.=", see fig. 6-10)

• If "AC" is selected, only the alternating voltage portion of the test signal is represented. The pre-set AC coupling appears as a "~" symbol on the touchs-creen.

If "OFF" is selected in the channel menu, the "Coupling" button is not visible.

.

If "Channel B" is already off, the OFF choice does not appear for "Channel A" and vice-versa.

Coupling

Page 104: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-18 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Press on the slider and move it up or down the slide bar to shift the curve up or down.

Touch the slide bar above the slider to move the slider up step-by-step.

Touch the slide bar below the slider to move the slider down step-by-step.

When you press the "Default measurement" button the " Default measurements" mask appears displaying a list of available sample curves. Below the list are the "Display", "<", "Go to", "Print" and "Help" buttons.

Select a sample curve from the list. The selected line is highlighted.

Press the "Display" button in the "Default measurements" mask to display a doc-ument containing information on the selected curve and then display the selected sample curve itself in the "DSO" mask.

If none of the lines has been selected in the list, the prompt "First select a default measurement" is delivered. Acknowledge it with "OK".

• The "DSO" mask first displays a document. It may contain text, graphics and hotspots, and provides information on adaption, the fitting location of the test object and the operating conditions, for example. If the selected document is not available, the message "No document available" appears. Press the "Con-tinue" button to display the sample curve.

• The saved sample curve is displayed in the "DSO" mask in a different color to the measured value curve.

• The "Default measurement" button is highlighted.

• The name of the default measurement is displayed in an information box dis-played in the upper right portion of the mask.

• The measuring parameters for the selected channel are set to the values with which the curve of the default measurement was saved. While a default mea-surement is on display, only the slide control and the trigger and freeze frame functions can be operated.

You can now compare the cyclically measured curve with the fixed sample curve.

Press the "Default measurement" button again to end the "Default measurement" function. The hidden buttons reappear.

Defaultmeasurement

Display

Page 105: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-19C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

If, during the "Default measurements" function, you press the "Channel A", "Channel B", "Trigger mode", "Measuring mode", "Cursor 1" or "Cursor 2" but-ton (the last two appear when the "Freeze frame" function is opened), the "Default measurements" function closes automatically and the default curve dis-appears.

Press this button in the "Default measurements" mask to return to the "DSO" mask without selecting a default measurement.

6.4.2 Trigger Mode

Press the Trigger mode" button to show the operating functions for "Channel", "Coupling", "Edge" and "Vertical movement" under the display box and set them.

A slider also appears at the right edge of the display box which you can use to set the trigger level.

Fig. 6-12 "DSO" mask, trigger mode

The vertical position of the trigger point in the display field ("T" symbol) indi-cates the trigger voltage. If it is within the valid measuring range the trigger point is lit blue; otherwise it appears red.

Trigger mode

Test InstrumentsDSO

Auto mode

Channel Coupling Edge

2 V/Div.=

2 V/Div.=

5 ms/Div.

T 0

Channel B

Channel A

Freeze frame

Multimeter

Measuring mode

Go to HelpPrint

0.0

Page 106: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-20 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Press the "Channel" button to select the measurement connection for the trigger signal.

A pull-up menu appears with the following options:

Pick-upkVDSO2DSO1

The line you select is highlighted.

Select the desired measurement connection for triggering and press the "Chan-nel" button again.

Press the "Coupling" button to select the "Coupling" for "Trigger mode".

Depending on what is selected, "Channel A" or "Channel B" and the "Coupling" that is set there, a pull-up menu appears with at least some of the following options:

HFLFDCAC

The selected line is highlighted.

Select the desired coupling and then press the "Coupling" button again.

• If "HF" is selected, the high frequency portions of the trigger signal are filte-red out.

• If "LF" is selected, the low frequency portions of the trigger signal are filtered out.

• If "DC" is selected, the trigger signal is DC coupled.

• If "AC" is selected, the trigger signal is AC coupled. This function cannot be used in Draw mode.

Channel

Coupling

.

If the "Pick-up" trigger signal is selected, the "Coupling" button is not visible.

Page 107: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-21C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Press the "Edge" button to select the edge of the trigger or test signal you want to trigger.

A pull-up menu appears with the following selections:

neg.pos.

The selected line is highlighted.

Select the desired edge and then press the "Edge" button again.

• If "neg." is selected, the falling edge of the trigger or test signal is used.

• If "pos." is selected, the rising edge of the trigger or test signal is used.

Press this button to move the curve gradually to the right and so bring the left portion of the display box into view.

Press this button to move the curve gradually to the left and so bring the right portion of the display box into view.

Press the slider and move it up and down the slide bar to change the trigger level.

Press on the slide bar above the slider to move the slider up and set the trigger level to positive voltage values.

Press on the slide bar below the slider to move the slider down and set the trigger level to negative voltage values.

Edge

.

If the "Pick-up" trigger signal is selected, the "Edge" button is not visible.

.

The slider is not visible when the "Pick-up" trigger signal is selected.

Page 108: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-22 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

6.4.3 Measuring mode

The "Measuring mode" button is used to set parameters for recording measured values.

After you press this button, the buttons "Auto Setup", "Auto Level", "Auto", "Normal", "Single" and "Draw mode" are displayed under the display box.

Fig. 6-13 "DSO" mask, Auto Level mode, Measuring mode

In auto setup mode the amplitudes of channel A and B, the time base and the trig-ger threshold are set automatically.

Auto setup is performed only once each time it is called. Measuring mode then switches automatically to auto level mode.

In auto level mode the set trigger threshold (percentage threshold in the range ±100 % of the signal amplitude) is tracked automatically so that a triggered image is always visible independent of the signal amplitude.

In auto mode measured value acquisition starts automatically in free-running operation when a valid trigger event occurs (according to the pre-set trigger level) or when a wait time dependent on the selected time base has elapsed (no freeze frame).

In normal mode, cyclical data collection takes place only when a valid trigger event occurs. If the trigger is missing, a prompt appears in the display box at the right.

Measuring mode

2 V/Div.=

2 V/Div.=

5 ms/Div.

T 0

Auto Setup Auto Normal Single Draw mode

Test InstrumentsDSO

Auto level mode

Trigger mode

Channel B

Channel A

Freeze frame

Test InstrumentsDSO

Measuring mode

Trigger mode

Channel B

Channel A

Freeze frame

Go to HelpPrint

Auto Setup

Auto Level

Auto

Page 109: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-23C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

In single mode, a measurement is taken only once after a valid trigger event.

In draw mode measured value acquisition takes place without a trigger, the curve is plotted from left to right continuously. Draw mode displays low-frequency sig-nals.

Single

.

The "Auto Setup" and "Auto Level" functions can only be used if triggered internally (that is, the trigger signal must be selected as a measure channel) or if the trigger pick-up is used.

Auto level and auto setup can only function smoothly with periodic signals with low interference.

Draw mode

.

The time base in draw mode can be set from 0.2 to 100 s/DIV.

Page 110: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-24 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

6.4.4 Freeze Frame with Cursor

6.4.4.1 Freeze Frame with One Cursor Displayed

Press the "Freeze frame" button.

Cyclical repetition of the test is paused and the last curve is frozen.

The "Cursor 1" and "Cursor 2" buttons also appear.

Press the "Freeze frame" button again.

Cyclical repetition of the measurement restarts and the display is updated on a continuous basis.

Freeze frame remote control

Press the button on the end of the measuring lead test probe to start the "Freeze frame" feature by remote control.

Press the "Cursor 1" or "Cursor 2" button to determine voltage values at specific time points on the curve.

The following mask appears when you press the button:

Fig. 6-14 "DSO" mask, freeze frame with a cursor

Freeze frame

Cursor 1

Cursor 2

Test InstrumentsDSO

Auto mode

Multimeter

Cursor 2

Cursor 1

Freeze frame2 V/Div.=

2 V/Div.=

5 ms/Div.

T 0

Amplitude channel A

Amplitude channel B

Time value

-15.1 ms

0.00 V

4.60 V

Cursor

Go to HelpPrint

Page 111: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-25C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

The "Amplitude Channel A" display box (amplitude) shows the voltage value at the point in the curve for channel A where the cursor is positioned.

The "Amplitude Channel B" display box shows the voltage value at the point in the curve for channel B where the cursor is positioned.

The "Time value" display box shows the time value at the point in the curve where the cursor is positioned, referred to the trigger point (symbol "T").

Touch the curve to move the cursor (rough control).

Press this button to move the cursor to the left (fine control).

Press this button to move the cursor to the right (fine control).

Parameters changed If you change parameters while using the "Freeze frame" function, the curve on display is not affected. The message "Parameter changed" does, however, appear in the information box at the right because the curve and the set parameters no lon-ger match.

6.4.4.2 Freeze Frame with Both Cursors Displayed

Press the "Freeze frame" button.

Cyclical repetition of the test is paused and the last curve is frozen.

The "Cursor 1" and "Cursor 2" buttons also appear.

Press the "Freeze frame" button again.

Cyclical repetition of the measurement restarts and the display is updated on a continuous basis.

Freeze frame remote control

Press the button on the end of the measuring lead test probe to start the "Freeze frame" feature by remote control.

Freeze frame

Page 112: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-26 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Voltage difference values

Press the "Cursor 1" and "Cursor 2" buttons to set the voltage and time difference values at specific time points on the curve.

Press the "Cursor 1" button and place the cursor on the curve at the point for which you want to determine the voltage and/or time differences for cursor 2 (ref-erence), as described in section 6.4.4.1.

Press the "Cursor 2" button and place the cursor at the point on the curve for which you want to determine the voltage differences to the position of cursor 1.

When the "Cursor 2" button is pressed, cursor 1 cannot be moved.

Touch the curve to move the cursor (rough control).

Press this button to move the cursor to the left (fine control).

Press this button to move the cursor to the right (fine control).

The following mask appears when you have pressed both buttons:

Fig. 6-15 "DSO" mask, freeze frame with two cursors

Cursor 1

Cursor 2

Cursor 2

Cursor 1

2 V/Div.=

2 V/Div.=

5 ms/Div.

T 0

Amplitude diff. A

Amplitude diff. B

Time difference

25.1 ms

2.30 V

4.60 V

MultimeterCursor

Test InstrumentsDSO

Auto mode

Freeze frame

HelpPrintGo to

Page 113: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Operating Manual VAS 50516-27C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

The "Amplitude difference A" display box shows the voltage difference between the two points on the curve for channel A where the cursors are located.

The "Amplitude difference B" display box shows the voltage difference between the two points on the curve for channel B where the cursors are located.

The "Time difference" field shows the time difference value between the points where the cursors are located.

6.4.5 Tips and Information

Auto setup - Your most valuable button

The DSO is equipped with an auto setup mode which automatically calculates and makes all DSO settings in response to periodic input signals. If channels A and B and the trigger are correctly selected, after a short time you will get an opti-mally triggered display which continues in "Auto level" mode.

If no curve is displayed, check why in the following order:

1. Are the DSO leads correctly connected to the tester?For most applications connect the DSO leads as follows:DSO1 lead to input DSO1, DSO2 lead to input DSO2

2. Is the correct channel input selected?For most applications set the DSO for "Channel A" or "Channel B" as fol-lows:Channel A to DSO1 (default), channel B to DSO2 (default)

3. Is the correct trigger channel selected? For most applications set the channel in trigger mode as follows:Channel to DSO1 (default)

4. Repeat auto setup.

If possible, auto setup mode with switch to auto level mode is always preferable. Auto setup can also be repeated at any time.

No trigger In "Normal" and "Single" modes: The triggering is only optimum if you adjust the trigger point to an unambiguous amplitude value. Use the trigger’s fine adjuster. If the trigger is outside the amplitude, the message "No trigger" appears. Depending on the preconditions, no signal characteristic at all or a frozen signal characteristic (no measurement) will be displayed.

Now return the trigger manually to the amplitude range until the message disap-pears.

Page 114: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50516-28 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test Instruments

Auto-level In auto level mode you can trigger signals independently of their amplitude and zero position, because then the triggering is based on a percentage amplitude value.

When you move out of auto setup mode triggering is set automatically to 0 % of the amplitude value. In trigger mode you can use the slide control to set any unambiguous trigger value between ± 100%; otherwise the DSO triggers in the middle of the measured signal.

Auto If you have no information about the signal, use auto mode. You will then get a signal curve even if the trigger is outside the amplitude.

Now adjust the trigger manually to an unambiguous value in the amplitude range.

Normal Use normal mode if you are familiar with operation of the DSO. You will only get a triggered image when the trigger is within the amplitude range of the mea-sured signal.

Single In single mode you can record a one-off event. The signal is measured and dis-played immediately as a freeze frame. Note that a valid trigger event must have occurred.

Page 115: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

7 Guided Fault Finding

7.1 Overview

The "Guided Fault Finding" operating mode "guides" you from detecting a vehi-cle malfunction (fault symptoms) to finding the fault origin and solution. All vehicle information (equipment, symptoms, functions and components, docu-ments, and test programs) is compiled automatically.

All functions in the "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" and "Test Instruments" operating modes are available for "Guided Fault Finding".

The fault symptoms are delivered to guided fault finding from two different sources:

• Fault memory contents

• Complaint reports

In addition, you have the option of selecting and executing function tests of sus-pect functions or components.

The guided fault finding process is shown in fig. 7-1.

Vehicleidentification

Guided fault finding begins with vehicle identification. You can choose the vehi-cles and basic characteristics from selection menus un a sequence of five masks. At this point, the tester does not need to be connected to the vehicle.

Vehicle system test After the vehicle identification, the vehicle system test is performed with the diagnostic cable connected and the ignition on. All electronic vehicle systems that could occur in the identified vehicle are displayed in a list. The vehicle com-munication checks which vehicle systems are available, and their fault memories are read.

.

On devices with marque separation you can only use "Guided fault finding" mode if at least one marque-specific CD is installed on the VAS 5051. For details of installation of marque-specific CDs refer to section 9.4.

Page 116: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Complaints If no fault is detected in the vehicle system test, the guided fault finding automat-ically branches to input of complaints. You can enter the customer’s complaints as well as your own observations. Several symptoms can be formulated to arrive at precise fault characteristics. The tester analyzes the symptoms with the expert knowledge held on the hard drive.

Function andcomponent selection

Here you can enter functions or components that, based on your experience, could be possible sources of the fault. The selected functions and/or components are entered in the test plan (Own test plan).

Fig. 7-1 Principle of the guided fault finding process

Vehicle identification

Vehicle system test

All fault memoriesempty?

Test plan

no

yes

Function test

End guided fault finding

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test instruments

Complaints

Function/component selection

'

(

)

*

*

Page 117: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Test plan From the test plan, the function test or tests is/are processed one after the other. The results lead to a re-evaluation of the test plan so the sequence of suggested function tests may change, function tests may be removed or others may be added.

Function test A function test is a sequence of test steps that check a vehicle’s functioning, a component group or a component based on fixed requirements. The test program delivers an indication of the status of the tested vehicle functions, component groups or components, e.g.: "OK", "Not OK", "Don't know", etc. The function test is dialog-guided, uses the test instruments options (multimeter, oscilloscope), and communicates with the vehicle systems.

Exit guidedfault finding

When you exit from the guided fault finding, the fault memories of the electronic vehicle systems are erased automatically and then read out. If faults still occur, the guided fault finding can be continued or canceled based on the user's deci-sion.

Switch In guided fault finding, you can switch to the "Test Instruments" or "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" operating modes via buttons on the navigation bar. Then you can exe-cute a measurement or diagnostic function, for example. "Test Instruments" and "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" functions currently in use by guided fault finding are hidden.

Switching back to "Guided Fault Finding" mode always exits the mask in which the "Switch" button was clikked. There processing of the mode can be resumed without limitations.

7.2 Start Guided Fault Finding

"Guided Fault Finding" is called up from the start mask by choosing the button with the same name. The start is followed immediately by the vehicle identifica-tion function.

.

You can save time by starting guided fault finding immediately with a connected diagnostic cable and the vehicle’s ignition on. Then, after the vehicle identifica-tion the VAS 5051 automatically interrogates the fault memory contents of the definitely installed vehicle systems.

Page 118: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Fig. 7-2 Starting guided fault finding

7.3 "Go to" Destination Menu

The "Go to" destination menu can be used for fast switching between several masks.

The destination menu contains the titles of the fault finding masks that have been accessed, e.g. "Vehicle system test", "Fault memory contents", "Test plan" and sub-masks of the function test. User-guided masks such as "Complaint report", "Function/Component Selection" as well as "Documents" also are contained in the menu (for example see fig. 7-30).

Since the "Test Instruments" and "Vehicle self-diagnosis" operating modes can be activated directly with buttons on the navigation bar, they are not included in the "Go to" destination menu.

Page 119: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-5C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

7.4 Vehicle Identification

The vehicle identification function serves to provide a unique identification of the vehicle and its equipment, and subsequently delivers the associated test data.

In vehicle identification, you select the basic characteristics of the vehicle from a series of selection lists. Basic characteristics are:

• marque,

• type,

• model year,

• body version and

• engine code letters

The selected characteristics are shown in the right-side information window so you can check the selection.

You can switch to the previous mask at any time with the "Back" button in order to make a different selection.

Fig. 7-3 "Select engine code" mask

5HDGLQJDLGIRU

JXLGHGIDXOWILQGLQJ

FRORUHGEDFNJURXQG

PDWFKLQJWKHGHVFULSWLRQ

0DUTXH9:

7\SH3DVVDW!

0RGHO\HDU

%RG\YHUVLRQ6DORRQ

(QJLQHFRGH

$'5O0RWURQLF

&RQILUPYHKLFOH

LGHQWLILFDWLRQ

'LDJQRVWLFFDEOH

FRQQHFWHG"

9HKLFOHV\VWHPWHVW

yes

Guided fault findingVehicle identification

Select engine code

Test instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

VWPassat 1997>1997Saloon

ACK 2,8l Motronic / 142kW

AEB 1,8l Motronic / 110kWAFN 1,9l TDI / 81kWAGZ 2,3l Motronic / 110kWALP 2,3l Motronic / 110kWAHL 1,6l Simons / 74kWAHU 1,9l TDI / 66kW

ADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Page 120: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-6 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Confirm vehicle identification

The following mask terminates the vehicle identification. The selected character-istics are shown in the right-side information window. Check whether the vehicle to be diagnosed matches your entries. You can switch to the previous mask with the "Back" button to make changes.

Fig. 7-4 "Confirm vehicle identification" mask

When you choose the "Continue" button, the diagnostic data belonging to the vehicle indicated is loaded from the hard drive and delivered ready for the further guided fault finding steps.

When you switch to the next mask, "Vehicle system test", a check is made whether the diagnostic cable is connected to the vehicle. If there is no connection, a mask appears indicating where the diagnostic cable should be connected in the vehicle.

If the connection via the diagnostic cable is OK, the "Vehicle system test" mask is displayed.

(QJLQHFRGH

&RQILUPYHKLFOH

LGHQWLILFDWLRQ

'LDJQRVWLFFDEOH

FRQQHFWHG"

9HKLFOHV\VWHPWHVW

\HV

QR

Guided fault findingVehicle identification

Confirm vehicle identification

Test instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

If the vehicle identification has beencarried out correctly, then press the "Continue (>)" key as confirmation.

You may page back using the "Back (<)" key.

Use the "Go to" key and select "Cancel" to return to the "Select Marque" mask .

Use the "Go to" key and select "Exit" to return to the Start mask.

Page 121: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-7C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

7.5 Connect Tester and Vehicle via Diagnostic Cable

If you have not yet connected the diagnostic cable to the vehicle, after confirma-tion of the vehicle identification (see fig. 7-4) you receive a prompt to make the connection. The location of the diagnostic connection is shown in a document.

Fig. 7-5 "Connect VAS 5051 to vehicle" mask

&RQILUPYHKLFOH

LGHQWLILFDWLRQ

'LDJQRVWLFFDEOH

FRQQHFWHG"

9HKLFOHV\VWHPWHVW

QR

\HV

(QJLQHFRGH

Guided fault findingVehicle identification

Connect VAS 5051 to vehicle

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Connect the VAS 5051 tester using diagnostic cable VAS 5051/1 or VAS 5051/3 as follows:

- Remove the cover from the diagnostic connection to the right of the hand brake lever.- Now switch on the ignition.

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Page 122: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-8 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

7.6 Vehicle System Test

The vehicle system test is used to check the electronic systems installed in the vehicle. Communication with the control unit of the corresponding vehicle sys-tem is checked, and the fault memory read out, individually in succession.

All possible vehicle systems and their variants for the identified vehicle are shown in the "Vehicle system test" mask (see fig. 7-6). They are compiled in a list in the following groups:

• Drive unit and power transmission

• Running gear

• Body / Heating, cooling, air conditioning / Electrical system

For the sake of clarity, the lines for each group are distinguished by different background colors.

The vehicle system test is performed

• when the diagnostic cable is already connected, by choosing the "Continue" button in the "Confirm vehicle identification" mask (see fig. 7-4) or

• by connecting the diagnostic cable subsequently and then choosing the "Con-tinue" button in the "Connect vehicle to VAS 5051" mask (see fig. 7-5).

Observe vehicle system test

In the vehicle system test the possibly installed control units are addressed via the diagnostic lead connected to the vehicle, and their fault memories are read. If the communication link is successfully set up, in the "Vehicle system test" mask the relevant list entry, e.g. " Motronic engine management system", is highlighted (control unit successfully identified with or without fault).

If a control unit included in the selection list has not been identified, it should be manually selected from the mask by the user. Only then will the associated diag-nostic data be delivered in the function/component selection .

The rest of the vehicle system test can be observed on the touchscreen. The desig-nation of the tested vehicle system is shown in the left-side information box, e.g.:

Motronic engine management system

During the "Read fault memory" process the associated line is flagged by an arrow symbol: "<==".

Identified vehicle systems are highlighted with a black bar; the text is inverted. Vehicle systems that are ruled out by an already identified system are skipped.

For vehicle systems that cannot be unambiguously identified, a prompt appears when necessary to clarify the actually installed equipment.

Systems whose fault memories are not empty show the status "Fault" in the line at the right.

Page 123: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-9C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

After an executed test, the information box in the mask shows the message:

Control units interrogated

The vehicle system test requires a functioning diagnostic connection to the vehi-cle, otherwise the following message appears during communication with the first control unit:

Diagnostic bus faulty

No voltage or voltage too lowon diagnostic bus

Vehicle battery voltage too low?Diagnostic connector connectedto vehicle?

Fault number: 200.17

First check whether the ignition is on and confirm the message with "Repeat". If the message appears again, your further decisions should take account of whether the vehicle system is definitely installed or not. All entries for vehicle systems highlighted with a black bar in the "Vehicle system test" mask are definitely installed.

Definitely installed control unitnot detected

If communication with a definitely installed control unit is not possible, no mark is made in the list and the following prompt appears:

Communication withdefinitely installed control unitnot possible.

Retry Cancel

If no communication is possible after "Retry", select "Cancel".

The following prompt appears:

Control unit not recognized.

To enter it anyway,choose "OK".

Choose "OK" so that the data relating to the definitely installed control unit (diagnostic objects) are available.

.

If all control units have been interrogated, you must select the "definitely instal-led control units" in the "Vehicle system test" mask manually.

Page 124: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-10 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Optional vehicle system not recognized

If an optionally installed vehicle system could not be identified, its entry in the list is not marked. The same prompt as for "definitely installed" control units appears.

Click "OK" if you are sure that the vehicle system is installed.

Observe vehicle system test

Fig. 7-6 "Vehicle system test" mask, test finished

During the vehicle system test, all the buttons on the navigation bar except "Help" are hidden.

After the vehicle system test is finished, you can navigate with the "Continue" or "Go to" buttons.

Pressing the "Continue" button always leads you to the "Fault memory contents" mask (see fig. 7-7).

You can use the "Go to" button in this mask to enter the "Function/component selection" mask (see section 7.11).

'LDJQRVWLFFDEOH

FRQQHFWHG"

&RQILUPYHKLFOH

LGHQWLILFDWLRQ

9HKLFOHV\VWHPWHVW

5HDGIDXOWPHPRU\

QRQ

\HV

'LVSOD\IDXOWPHPRU\

FRQWHQWV

)DXOW

SUHVHQW"

QR

\HV

Guided fault findingVehicle system test

Control units interrogated

Fault

Test Instruments Vehicleself-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Motronic engine management system

ABS - Bosch 5.3

Airbag - with side airbag

Immobiliser / Dash panel insert

Convenience system - front door control units

4-speed automatic gearbox 01N4-speed automatic gearbox 01V

ABS/EDS Bosch 5.3ABS/EDS Bosch 5.3 QUATTRO

Airbag - without side airbagClimatronic

Immobiliser / dash panel insert with navigation system

Convenience system - front and rear door control units

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Table 7-1 Status symbols in the vehicle system test

Symbol Meaning

Normal text Control unit not identified or deselected

Inverted text Control unit identified

Fault memory empty

? Fault memory unknown

Fault Fault memory not empty

Control unit has no communications interface

Control unit manually selected

Control unit manually deselected

<== Control unit being interrogated

Status symbols in the vehicle system test

Page 125: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-11C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

7.7 Fault Memory Contents

The "Fault memory contents" mask informs you of faults in the vehicle electronic systems. If no fault is detected, the following text appears in the lower left-side information box:

No faults detected

If faults are detected, the mask displays the number of faults and lists them indi-vidually. Each entry consists of the fault code, fault text and notes on the type of fault.

Fault memory con-tents and their allo-cation

Fig. 7-7 "Fault memory contents" mask

If an error was indicated, choose the "Continue" button to move into the "Test plan" mask (see fig. 7-8), otherwise you are routed to the "Complaint report" mask (see section 7.10).

9HKLFOHV\VWHPWHVW

5HDGIDXOWPHPRU\

'LVSOD\IDXOWPHPRU\

FRQWHQWV

)DXOW

SUHVHQW"

QR

\HV

7HVWSODQ

Test InstrumentsFault memory contents

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Convenience system central module 1 fault(s) detected

00928Locking unit for CL driver side F220Implausible signal

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Page 126: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-12 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

7.8 Test Plan

When you switch to the "Test plan" mask, the results of the previously run masks "Fault memory contents", "Complaint report" and "Function/ Component selec-tion" are analyzed, and from them a test proposal is generated and shown in list form (see fig. 7-8). The priority of the tests is printed according to ranking. In the concrete example, the contents of a fault memory (see fig. 7-7) lead to a test pro-posal that is entered in the test plan and preselected. Choose the "Continue" but-ton to start the marked function test.

Fig. 7-8 Test plan (based on fault memory contents)Status information

The "Test plan" mask contains status information regarding the function test at the left next to the test proposal.

'LVSOD\IDXOWPHPRU\

FRQWHQWV

)DXOW

GHWHFWHG"

QR

\HV

7HVWSODQ

)XQFWLRQWHVW

Guided fault findingTest plan

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Locking unit for CL driver side F220 -Implausible signal- F220 - locking unit for central locking - driver side

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Function test of thevehicle functions or components

Function test status

Symptom

Table 7-2 Meaning of icons for the function test status

Icon Meaning: Function test

- Not yet executed

OK OK

OK! OK and checked again

OK? Probably OK

X Not OK

? Result unknown or canceled

? Being executed

Page 127: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-13C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

7.9 Function Test

A function test is assigned to each vehicle function, component group and com-ponent. Its task is to test the set requirements. The result is either "OK", "Not OK" or "Test result unknown".

A function test mask is shown in fig. 7-9. Each function test consists of self-con-tained steps that can be repeated after processing via the Go to menu. The desig-nation of the current test step being run through is shown in the mask in the left-side information window.

A function test can use the full measurement functionality of the tester over the diagnostic bus, as well as the multimeter and the oscilloscope. Also, you are actively involved in the process for connecting measuring leads, making deci-sions and entering values, for example. The corresponding image documents are also offered for display in the function test.

After completing the function test, you switch back to the "Test plan" mask. There you can access alternative diagnostic procedures via the "Go to" menu (complaints, function/component selection).

When a function test is started, in this example a general note on the test first appears:

Fig. 7-9 Function test, general note

'LVSOD\IDXOWPHPRU\

FRQWHQWV

)DXOW

GHWHFWHG"

QR

\HV

7HVWSODQ

)XQFWLRQWHVW

/RFNLQJXQLW

Ready

Note

Meßtechnik Fahrzeug-Eigendiagnose

Sprung HilfeDruckTest instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Guided fault finding

Function test

Locking unit for CL driver side F220

This test checks the locking unit for central locking - driver side -F220- and its wiring.

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Page 128: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-14 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

As the function test continues, various masks appear depending on the test, for example:

Fig. 7-10 Function test, output to the user

Choose the "Fuse assignment" button. You immediately get the associated image document (see fig. 7-11).

Fig. 7-11 Document display, "Fuse assignment" example

3URPSW

2XWSXWWRWKHXVHU

)XVHDVVLJQPHQW

LPDJHGRFXPHQW

)XQFWLRQWHVW

/RFNLQJXQLW

Yes

No Fuse assignment

Check fuses

Guided fault finding

Function test

Locking unit for CL driver side F220

Meßtechnik Fahrzeug-Eigendiagnose

Sprung HilfeDruckTest Instrument Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

- Check fuses -S14- and -S38-.Note:Fuses from number S24 upwards are labeled with an extra 2 in the current flow diagram - e.g. S38 is labeled as S238 in the current flow diagram.

Are the fuses OK?

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Fuse box: Fuse assignment

Guided fault finding

Function test

Locking unit for CL driver side F220

Meßtechnik Fahrzeug-Eigendiagnose

Sprung HilfeDruckTest Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Page 129: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-15C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Return to the previous mask with the "Back" button and proceed to the next test step with the "Continue" button.

One of the components of the function test in the example is a voltage measure-ment. The relevant mask contains an instruction as to where the measuring leads should be connected. The "Measure" button triggers the measurement process. The process also can be controlled remotely with the button on the measuring lead test probe, for example directly on the measurement object.

If no measurement is possible or if an external measurement device is to be used for the measurement, you can enter the value manually. Touch the result box (see fig. 7-12). A numeric keyboard appears.

Fig. 7-12 Function test, voltage measurement

After the function test, the guided fault finding mode returns to the "Test plan" mask (see fig. 7-8).

$GGLWLRQDOPDVNV

0HDVXUHPHQW

9ROWDJH

(QGRI

)XQFWLRQWHVW

)XQFWLRQWHVW

/RFNLQJXQLW

Test voltage to driver’s side central locking

Connector view

Pin assignment

Go to Print Help

Measure

-20.00 9.00 14.50 20.00

4 V

Voltage measurement

U/R/D test probe (+) on connector -T6r/5-COM test probe (-) on connector - T6r/4-The brown connector -T6r- is located in chamber 2 of the coupling station,

A-pillar, driver side (see <Connector view> button).

Guided fault finding

Function test

Locking unit for CL driver side F220

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

+"$,

Page 130: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-16 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

7.9.1 Test Dialogs

The following types of user/test dialogs occur within the function test:

• Yes/no questions with two buttons to answer

• Measurement instruction with one button to start or stop cyclical measured value display

• Prompts to the user with one button for messages

• Menus with selection options up to eight buttons

• Result displays with one button to start or stop cyclical measured value dis-play

• Displays without button for cyclical output of texts or values. A cyclical out-put can be interrupted either by program control from the test program or by pressing a button.

Input instructions to enter a number value or text by way of an on-screen key-board.

Each test dialog step is activated only by pressing a corresponding button, e.g. "Ready/Finished", "Yes", "No", etc.

Every test dialog step can contain buttons for displayable image documents. The images are displayed by choosing the appropriate button, switching into the doc-ument display and then returning to the test dialog step.

Yes/No question The "Yes/No question" mask is used to check test prerequisites. The mask may contain additional buttons to activate help texts or documents.

The "Yes/No question" is confirmed with the "Yes" or "No" button. Then the "Continue" button is active.

Dialog boxes with Yes/No questions, menus or prompts are continued automati-cally with the "Yes" button.

Page 131: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-17C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Measurement instruction

The workspace of the "Function test, Voltage measurement" mask (see fig. 7-12) contains a description of the measurement ("Test voltage to driver’s side central locking"), an indication of the measurement type ("Voltage measure-ment"), the instructions for connection of the measuring lead, and the specified target and measured values, with analog and numeric output.

The analog measured value display contains a numerically labeled scale. A rect-angle indicates the tolerance range for the measured value. The measured value appears as a horizontal, colored bar in the labeled scale. If the measured value is OK (green), the bar protrudes into the tolerance window.

The numeric display also contains the physical measured unit.

Measurements of numeric values must be triggered separately after setting up the specified connections and choosing the "Measure" button. The measurement is repeated cyclically several times, for as long as the button is pressed; the last measured value after pressing the "Continue" button is accepted. When you press the "Measure" button again, the continuous measurement is stopped and the last displayed value is maintained. For measurements that are triggered by a certain trigger condition (events), the "Measure" button releases the trigger. The mea-surement is triggered automatically when the trigger event occurs.

Alternatively, the "Measure" button can be remotely triggered via the button in the red test probe.

Default values,using own measu-ring equipment

If the internal measurement device is defective, or if you prefer your own mea-surement device, you can enter the determined test value via an on-screen key-board. The keyboard automatically appears when you touch the input box or if the internal test instruments are faulty. Remove the keyboard from view after ending input by choosing "Q" or "Continue" or by triggering a genuine measure-ment with the "Measure" button. The physical unit for the input (e.g.: V, mV) is set automatically.

Page 132: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-18 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Default value input in communication with vehicle systems

If communication with vehicle systems is not possible, a "Fault signal" dialog box appears. When you confirm the dialog box with the "Cancel" button, a fur-ther dialog box appears with the query:

Continue with default values?

If you answer the question with "yes", a keyboard for entry of data is displayed.

Using theon-screenkeyboard

A numeric keyboard is displayed in the test dialog window for input of default va-lues. Enter the values by pressing the buttons. The values you enter appear in the one-line display box of the test dialog window. You can erase entries backward character by character with the "C" button and then retype them. You can enter a maximum of 64 characters. Terminate input with the "Q" button or the "Continue" button. The keyboard is then hidden from view. You can display the keyboard again by clicking on the display box.

7.9.2 Working with the Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO)

Graphicalcurves

Graphical curves are measured and displayed cyclically by the DSO with the pa-rameters set by the function test. Choose the "Freeze frame" button to stop cyclical repetition of the measurement. The last display remains static. Choose the "Freeze frame" button again to restart cyclical repetition of the measurement. The "Freeze frame" button can also be activated with the button in the red test probe.

7.9.3 Exit Test Step

You can exit the "Function test" mask to switch to the "Test plan" only when all user inputs have properly terminated and an unambiguous test status has been re-ached. Missing information or user actions still needed are indicated by prompts.

.

Input of default values for measurement values from vehicle systems requires special knowledge about the system.

Page 133: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-19C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

7.9.4 Returning to the "Function Test" Mask

You can switch to a previous mask by choosing the "Back" button or via the "Go to" menu

7.9.5 Exit Guided Fault Finding

You always quit guided fault finding by choosing "Exit" from the "Go to" menu. This action erases the fault memories of the vehicle systems are erased and reads them out again to display any still existing faults. If a fault memory is still set, the following message appears:

All fault memories have been erased,but relevant faults have remained recordedor have been recorded again.

To restart from the "Fault memory contents"mask, press "OK".

To cancel and exit, press "Cancel".

Page 134: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-20 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

7.10 Complaint Report

The "Select complaint" mask is displayed automatically if no vehicle systems faults were detected in the "Fault memory contents" mask (see fig. 7-7) and you chose the "Continue" button there. The input of complaints is an extra option for input of fault symptoms.

The "Complaint report" masks contain lists of terms with which you can enter the complaints reported by the customer or those that you detect. A complaint can relate to a repair group or to perceptions, and is described by one or more fault symptoms.

You can select one element per mask from the lists of terms. Each selection is accepted immediately and an automatic switch is made to the next mask. You can go to the previous mask at any time with the "Back" button and change your selection. The selected complaints are displayed one after the other in the right-side information window of the masks.

You do not have to indicate all levels of a certain complaint. As soon as the "Con-tinue" button appears, you can switch to the "Display all selections" mask (see fig. 7-18).

Example of mask sequence: "Complaint directly related to repair group":

Fig. 7-13 "Select complaint" mask

(Select the "Complaint related to observation" option if you perceived a symptom by your senses.)

9HKLFOHV\VWHPWHVW

5HDGIDXOWPHPRU\

'LVSOD\IDXOWPHPRU\

FRQWHQWV

)DXOW

GHWHFWHG"

QR

\HV

7HVWSODQ

&RPSODLQW

UHSRUWV

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Guided fault finding

Complaint report

Select complaint

Complaint directly related to repair groupComplaint related to observation

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Page 135: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-21C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Fig. 7-14 "Select subsystem / observation" mask

For example, select the term "Drive unit" in the mask shown above and switch to the following mask (see fig. 7-15). The current path is shown in the right-side information window for clarity.

Fig. 7-15 "Select type / component" mask

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Guided fault finding

Complaint report

Select subsystem / observation

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Drive unitRunning gearBody

EngineGearboxImmobiliser

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Guided fault finding

Complaint report

Drive unit

Select type / component

Page 136: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-22 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Specify the symptom in detail by selecting a phrase. The preselection is shown in the information window.

Fig. 7-16 "Select assembly / feature" mask

Complete the symptom by selecting a further feature.

Fig. 7-17 "Select assembly / symptom" mask

Test Instruments Vehicleself-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Guided fault finding

Complaint report

Select assembly / feature

IdlingLack of powerSmoking

Cuts out when pulling awayCuts out sporadicallyHas brief harsh misfiresRunning rough, judderingDoes not respond to throttle after overrunResponds with delayJudders in overrunGlow period warning lamp flashes, fault lamp lit

Start

Drive unitEngine

The path is logged here.

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Guided fault finding

Complaint report

Select assembly / symptom

Intermittently fails to start

Poor starting when coldDoes not start at allPoor starting when warm

Starts up and cuts out again

Drive unitEngineStart

Page 137: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-23C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Fig. 7-18 "Display all selections" mask before acceptance of the symptom

The "Accept" button appears if the tester is aware of a diagnostic suspicion in respect of a vehicle system or component as the possible cause of the selected symptom (right-side information window). When you choose the "Accept" but-ton, the symptom is adopted into a list (see fig. 7-19).

Fig. 7-19 "Display all selections" mask after accepting the symptom

Test Instruments

Accept

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Guided fault finding

Complaint report

Drive unitEngineStartStarts up and cuts out again

Display all selections

Test Instruments

Erase

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Guided fault finding

Complaint report

Drive unit Engine Start Starts up and cuts out again

Display all selections

Drive unitEngineStartStarts up and cuts out again

Page 138: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-24 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

You can formulate additional symptoms. Go to the beginning of the complaint report using the Go to menu, and select another symptom.

Choose the "Continue" button to leave the "Complaint report" function and switch to the "Test plan" mask. When the switch is made, the tester delivers the test proposal matching the symptom and enters it in the test plan.

Fig. 7-20 -#Test plan with test proposal on the basis of an entered symptom

The further procedure continues as described in section 7.9.

Guided fault findingTest plan

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Engine - Start - Starts up and cuts out again

- Quantity injected- J362 - Immobilizer control unit

- N18 - Exhaust gas recirculation valve

Page 139: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-25C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

7.11 Function/Component Selection

You can use your personal expert knowledge with the help of the "Function/com-ponent selection" function in the course of guided fault finding. In contrast to the evaluation of fault memories (see section 7.7) or complaint reports (see section 7.10), here you can directly select suspect functions or components.

After selection of the functions or components, the tester automatically assigns the appropriate function tests. In this way, you set up your "own test plan". The designations of the functions or components appear in the "Test plan" mask under "Own test plan" if system-guided test proposals are already present. In the remainder of the example this is assumed to be the case.

You enter the "Function/component selection" mask from the "Vehicle system test" mask with the "Go to" button. Selection of function, repair group, compo-nent group and component from the displayed lists is spread over several masks, similarly to the complaint report (see section 7.10).

When selecting functions and components, the list display builds in the form of levels identified by indents to the right of the previous selection. Example:

Drive unit ADR Engine 01 - Systems capable of self-diagnosis

Electrical componentsetc.

Each indent indicates a selection in a mask. To jump back one level, select the previous level. Example:

Drive unit ADR Engine

13 - Crank operation etc.

Example of a mask sequence "Function/component selection":

9HKLFOHV\VWHPWHVW5HDG

IDXOWPHPRU\

'LVSOD\IDXOWPHPRU\FRQWHQWV

)DXOW

GHWHFWHG"

\HV

7HVWSODQ

)XQFWLRQ

&RPSRQHQW

VHOHFWLRQ

*RWR

.

Only functions and components of vehicles systems are displayed that are mar-ked in the "Vehicle system test" mask (fig. 7-6), i.e. ones that were automati-cally identified or selected manually.

-!!!

.".#$"!

Page 140: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-26 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Fig. 7-21 "Select function or component" mask

For example, select "Drive unit". After your selection, the following mask is dis-played automatically.

Fig. 7-22 "Select function or component" mask, 1st level

In this mask, detail the function/component.

Guided fault findingFunction/component selection

Drive unitRunning gearBodyTesting and measuring devices, supplementary items

Select function or component

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Guided fault findingFunction/component selection

Select function or component

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Drive unit ADR - Engine 4-speed automatic gearbox 01N

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Page 141: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-27C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

After your selection, the following mask is displayed automatically.

Fig. 7-23 "Select function or component" mask, 2nd level

In this sub-mask, select the desired component group. To change your selection, touch the previous selection.

Fig. 7-24 "Select function or component" mask, 3rd level

Guided fault finding

Select function or component

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Drive unit

01 - Self-diagnosis 32 Torque converter 37 Controls, housing 38 Gears, Hydraulic controls 39 Final drive, Differential

4-speed automatic gearbox 01N

Function/component selectionVWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Guided fault finding

Select function or component

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Drive unit 4-speed automatic gearbox 01N

Voltage supply Electrical components Connections to engine Connections to air conditioning system Connections to dash panel insert Functions

01 - Self-diagnosis

Function/component selectionVWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Page 142: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-28 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

In this sub-mask, select the desired component or a function. The selection is dis-played until you touch the "Continue" button, which takes you to the test plan.

Fig. 7-25 "Select function or component" mask, 4th level

The selected diagnosis object "F-brake-light switch" is adopted into the test plan.

Fig. 7-26 "Test plan" mask (based on symptom and function/component selection)

The further procedure continues as described in section 7.9.

Guided fault finding

Select function or component

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Drive unit 4-speed automatic gearbox 01N 01 - Self-diagnosis Electrical components

F125 - Multi-function switchF8 - Kick-down switch

G38 - Gearbox speed senderG68 - Road speed senderG69 - Throttle valve potentiometerJ217 - Automatic gearbox control unitJ226 - Relay for starter inhibitor and reversing lightN110 - Selector lever lock solenoidValve chest

F - Brake-light switch

Function/component selectionVWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Guided fault findingTest plan

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Engine - Start - starts up and cuts out againN18 - Exhaust gas recirculation valve

- Quantity injected- J362 - Immobilizer control unit

-

System test plan

Own test plan => F- Brake-light switch

VWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Page 143: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-29C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

7.12 Documents

The "Documents" function can be reached from the "Function/component selec-tion" mask by way of the "Go to" button. In the "Function/component selection" mask, available documents, e.g. installation locations, pin assignments, etc., can be selected and displayed.

Graphic documents are displayed in the work window. Text documents have a vertical scroll bar.

Documents also appear in the function test masks. There they are offered directly by way of labeled buttons.

Example of a mask sequence starting from "Function/component selection":

Fig. 7-27 Function/component selection, "Documents" selected as destination

You can call up the "Select documents" dialog box for a selected function or com-ponent by way of the "Go to" menu.

Guided fault finding

Select function or component

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

HelpPrintGo to

Drive unit 4-speed automatic gearbox 01N 01 Self diagnosis

Electrical components Automatic gearbox control unit E45 - Cruise control system switch F8 - Kick-down switch F - Brake-light switch F47 - Brake pedal switch G38 - Gearbox speed sender G68 - Road speed sender G69 - Throttle valve potentiometer G93 - Gearbox oil temperature sender J217 - Automatic gearbox control unit

F125 - Multi-function switch

”Go to” destination

CancelExitVehicle system testDocuments

Function/component selectionVWPassat 1997>1997SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Page 144: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-30 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Fig. 7-28 "Select documents" dialog box

The displayable documents are listed in the "Select documents" dialog box. Select the desired document, and choose the "Display" button. Then the docu-ment is displayed.

Fig. 7-29 Document display

The displayed document may contain hotspots (rectangular sensitive areas). If you touch a hotspot on-screen, the associated detail document will appear.

Guided fault finding

Drive unit Automatisches Getriebe 01 Eigendiagnose

Elektrische Bauteile Automatisches Getriebe E45 - Schalter für Geschwindigkeitsregelanlage F125 - Multifunktionsschalter F8 - K

Funktion bzw. Bauteil auswählen

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Select

VWPassat 1997>1997LimousineADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Select documents

CancelDisplay

F125-Multi-function switch: Fitting locationConnector view

Function/component selection

Guided fault findingDisplay documents

VWPassat 1994>1996EstateADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

F125-Multi-function switch: Fitting location

Test Instruments

Page 145: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-31C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

7.13 Interrupt Guided Fault Finding

If you have entered the "Test plan" mask at least once, you can interrupt, save and later reload the guided fault finding operation in order to continue your work. You also have the option of interrupting your work for a short time and resume it later without saving and loading.

Pause When you activate the "Interrupt" function, a dialog box appears in which you can choose a short pause or a longer interruption. When you select pause, the fol-lowing text appears:

Work has been interrupted for a short time ("Pause").Press "OK" to end pause.Do not cancel pause withoutconsent or good reason.

By pressing the "OK" button:Work can be continued in the current mask.

Interrupting and Saving

You can interrupt a diagnosis job and save all relevant diagnostic data. After sav-ing, you switch automatically to the initial guided fault finding mask (see section 7.2).

Page 146: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-32 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Example of a mask sequence: "Save diagnosis job" starting from a function test:

Select "Interrupt" in the "Go to destina-tion" menu

Fig. 7-30 "Go to" destination with selected "Interrupt" function

Select "Work inter-ruption"

Fig. 7-31 Function test, "Work interruption" dialog box

Block Circuit Diagram

Hilfe zu 4

Hilfe zu 3

Ja

1Selector lever in position - P-2. Hand brake on!3. Fuse S20 OK?4. Earth connections to gearbox OK?5. Switch on ignition!

Are the test conditions established?

Establishment of test conditions

Guided fault findingFunction test

VWPassat 1997>1998SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kWF - brake-light switch

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

”Go to” destination

InterruptCancelExitVehicle system testFault memory contentsComplaint reportTest planFunction/component selectionDocumentsTest step: Establishment of test conditionsQuery: Establishment of test conditions

1. Selector lever in position - P-2. Hand brake on!3. Fuse S20 OK?4. Earth connections to gearbox OK?5. Switch on ignition!

Are the test conditions established?

Block Circuit Diagram

Help on 4

Help on 3

Yes

Establishment of test conditions

Guided fault findingFunction test

F - brake-light switch

InterruptPause

Work interruption

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

To interrupt work for a short period and then continue press "Pause" or to interrupt for a long period and save all data press "Interrupt".

VWPassat 1997>1998SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

Page 147: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-33C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Enter job code

Fig. 7-32 "Enter job code" dialog box

With the "Enter job code" dialog box, you can use the on-screen keyboard to enter a job code for a diagnosis job you want to save and quit with the "Q" button. In addition to the code, the current date and time also are saved.

Loading A previously saved diagnosis job is loaded in the "Diagnosis job" mask. It can only be selected in the second mask of the vehicle identification function, "Select type", by selecting "Diagnosis job" from the "Go to" menu.

Select the desired job from a list of all saved diagnosis jobs. Then choose the "Load" button. Before the diagnosis job is loaded, a prompt appears asking if the diagnostic cable is connected. If you acknowledge the prompt with "OK", the "Test plan" mask appears. It displays the saved status of the interrupted function test. Choose the "Continue" button to start the interrupted function test.

Guided fault findingFunction test

VWPassat 1997>1996VariantAFN 1,9 Turbodieselmo / 92 kWF - brake-light switch

10 2 3 4

-C QZ

QP R S T

VU W X Y

GF H I J

65 7 8 9

LK M N O

BA C D E

MAIER KA-KZ 344

Enter job code

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

Page 148: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-34 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Example of a mask sequence "Load diagnosis job":

Select "Diagnosis job" as "Go to" destination"

Fig. 7-33 "Select type" sub-mask, "Diagnosis job" selected as "Go to" destination

Fig. 7-34 Diagnosis job, sub-mask "Edit/delete interrupted job"

Load the interrupted diagnosis job by choosing the "Edit" button.

Guided fault findingVehicle identification

Select type

VW

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

”Go to” destination

Golf 1998 >Golf 1998 > USA/CanadaPassat 1997 >Passat 1997 > -USA/Canada

CancelExitCD changeDiagnosis job

Guided fault findingDiagnosis job

Meßtechnik

Edit

Fahrzeug-Eigendiagnose

Sprung Hilfe

Delete

Druck

Edit/delete interrupted job

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

VWPassat 1997>1998SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW

ABC-123 08.08.1997 09:43A 56-78-97 MUE 16.07.1997 12:32

Page 149: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

Operating Manual VAS 50517-35C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Establish conditi-ons and press "OK" button

Fig. 7-35 Diagnosis job, "Job administration" dialog box

When you choose the "OK" button you exit the dialog box and switch to the test plan (see section 7.8).

Guided fault findingDiagnosis job

Edit/delete interrupted job

ABC-123 09.12.1996 09:43A 56-78-97 MUE 16.12.1996 12:32

OK Cancel

Test Instruments Vehicle self-diagnosis

Go to HelpPrint

VWPassat 1997>1998VariantADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kWJob administration

The vehicle belonging to this job

ABC-123 Passat 1997> 1998 SaloonADR 1,8l Motronic / 92kW 08.08.1996 09:43

must be connected to the diagnostic bus.

Page 150: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50517-36 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Guided Fault Finding

7.14 Diagnosis Log

If you have gotten as far as the "Test plan" mask at least once, you can print a log of the guided fault finding operation via the "Print/Diagnosis log" function.

The diagnosis log contains the following information:

• Workshop code of the VAS 5051

• Dealership identifier

• Version of the currently installed VAS 5051 software system

• Identification characteristics

• Fault memory contents

• Executed work steps (completed masks)

• Test plan list, divided into system and own test plans

• List of the function tests with names and individualtest steps

• Executed test steps with all proposals and mechanics’ decisions, all measure-ments and all vehicle system functions that lead to a result value as well as the result of the test step itself

• Start and end / cancellations and interruptions / loading of a diagnosis job

7.15 Function Test Log

The "function test log" function is the same as the "diagnosis log" except that, instead of the log data of all function tests, it contains only the data of the last test carried out.

Page 151: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Applications

Operating Manual VAS 50518-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

8 Applications

8.1 Overview

The "Applications" mode provides you with applications for which the program and data are accessed by inserting a CD in the drive.

Examples of future applications:

• Multimedia

• Bentley-CD

8.2 Start Application

Press the "Applications" button on the start mask.

Fig. 8-1 "System start", "Applications" mask selected

A selection mask (fig. 8-2) appears with a list of the current published applicati-ons.

Vehicle self-diagnosis

Test Instruments

Help

Administration

Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information SystemVersion - GB - / V01.00 24/12/1999

VAS 5051

Guided fault finding

Applications

Print

AdministrationAdministrationApplications

Page 152: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50518-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Applications

Fig. 8-2 Selection mask, Applications (example)

Start application 1. Insert the CD for the application. Follow the instructions for use of the CD drive given in section 2.1.2.

2. Select the application you want.

3. Press "Continue".

If the CD is inserted the application program on the CD will start.

8.2.1 Multimedia

In the "Multimedia" application you can run videos or slide presentations from the CD. The image information is displayed on the touchscreen. The sound can be heard at the audio output of the CD-ROM drive (fig. 2-5) via connected head-phones or active speakers.

The following functions are provided:

• Display and selection of titles

• Start

• Resume, Stop, Cancel

• Help function

• Go to

• Print

ApplicationsSelection mask

Select application

Go to HelpPrint

MultimediaStart Bentley CD

Page 153: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Applications

Operating Manual VAS 50518-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Insert a CD with multimedia data in "MPG" video format or "PPT" Powerpoint format in the CD drive and from the selection mask (fig. 8-2) select the "Multi-media" function.

Another selection mask appears with a list of the titles included on the inserted CD.

Select title Select a title from the list. It is highlighted.

Start video Press "Continue". If a title has been selected the tester switches to the playback mask, otherwise you are prompted to select one.

If the data carrier is faulty or the file is not in the correct format, there appears the message:

Unable to play video.

In the video playback mask only data in MPG format are displayed. Powerpoint presentations in PPT format use the Powerpoint Viewer.

Choose "Back" to cancel playback and call up the selection mask. As in other modes, you can also exit playback by way of the Go to menu.

Choose "Stop" to stop playback and resume. You can interrupt playback to gener-ate a screen dump or take a break, for example. The button label changes auto-matically from "Stop" to "Resume".

The only print function available is "Screen". To generate a screen dump , stop playback, press the "Print" button and select "Screen". You can resume playback when the hourglass symbol disappears.

Choose the "Help" button to call up help on the button and mask functions.

Stop

Print

Help

Page 154: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50518-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Applications

Page 155: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

Operating Manual VAS 50519-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

9 Administration

9.1 Overview

The "Administration" operating mode provides no functions for fault finding on vehicles. Rather, it is used for internal management of the tester. In this operating mode, you can adapt the settings to your requirements.

The following functions are available:

• Installation of updates

• Self-test of test instruments and diagnostic bus

• Input of the workshop code or change of dealership identifier

• Setting and selection of the signal tone, date and time, output language and initial graphic

• Information on an inserted CD

Input of workshop code

During initial startup, "Administration" is the only operating mode that can be activated after the tester starts. You must enter your workshop code to access the other VAS 5051 operating modes (see chapter 3 and section 9.6). After entering the workshop code once, only the dealership identifier can be changed with this function.

.

Later changes or deletions of an entered workshop code can be made only by specially authorized personnel who have access to the "Expanded functions" function (see section 9.9). Therefore, make sure to enter the correct code.

Page 156: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50519-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

9.2 Start Administration

"Administration" is activated in the start mask by choosing the "Administration" button.

Fig. 9-1 Start of administration

If you choose this button in the start mask, the tester will offer a list of all acces-sible functions (see fig. 9-1).

Page 157: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

Operating Manual VAS 50519-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

9.3 Select Function

If you select the "Administration" button in the start mask (see fig. 9-1), the fol-lowing mask will appear. It contains a list of all accessible functions in "Adminis-tration" mode.

Fig. 9-1 "Administration" mask, select function

You can select any function with the selection bar. This calls up a mask in which you can edit the function.

Administration

Select function

Administration

Go to Help

Install updateSelf-testEnter workshop codeSignal generatorDate/timeExpanded functionsSelect initial graphicContents listPrint formatInstallation or update of ESISActivate Telediagnosis

Equipment number: 12345VZ/Importer number: 678Dealership number: 98765 V. A. G. Partner Siemensallee 50, 76187 Karlsruhe

Print

Page 158: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50519-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

9.4 Install Update

You can load the contents of a newly distributed CD that contains an update of the software into the tester with the "Install update" function. Insert the CD and call up the function. The tester loads the new version from the CD to the hard drive.

On devices with marque separation you can install new or additional marque-spe-cific CDs on the VAS 5051 using this function.

1. Insert the marque-specific CD you want to use in the CD drive. Follow the instructions for inserting CDs given in section 2.1.2!

2. Confirm the security prompt to update or install the inserted marque-specific CD.

3. The contents of the marque-specific CD are installed in the VAS 5051. An on-screen progress indicator allows you to track the installation routine. As soon as it is finished, the VAS 5051 quits "Administration" mode and brings the Start mask back up (see fig. 3-11).

4. Remove the CD from the drive.

Install other marque-specific CDs as necessary by selecting the "Update-Installa-tion" function again in "Administration" mode and repeating steps 1-4.

9.5 Self-test

Overview When you select the "Self-test" function from the function list, you can start an integral self-test.

The test covers the two internal function units in the tester:

• Test Instruments

• Diagnostic bus

The result is shown on-screen as an "OK/NOK list" (see fig. 9-2).

If "NOK" and a fault number appears after a test, call SIEMENS Service (see section 11.4).

.

Marque-specific CDs always require a base CD to have first been installed on the VAS 5051. Marque-specific CDs cannot run unless a base CD has previ-ously been installed!

.

The self-test of Test Instruments does not include the attached measuring leads. For how to test them manually, see section 11.3.3.

Page 159: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

Operating Manual VAS 50519-5C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Fig. 9-2 "Self-test" mask, both units OK

Test Instruments 1. In order to execute a self-test of the test instruments, select the "Test instru-ment unit" line from the function list. The following request appears:

Disconnect all measuring leads from tester.

Confirm with the "OK" button when you have disconnected all measuring leads from the tester.

2. The self-test takes about 1 minute. During this time, no entries can be made. The result of the self-test is shown in the right portion of the work win-dow.

3. Reconnect all necessary measuring leads to the tester.

Self-testAdministration

Test instrument unitDiagnostic bus unit

Go to Help

OKOK

Equipment number: 12345VZ/Importer number: 678Dealership number: 98765 V.A.G. Partner Siemensallee 50, 76187 Karlsruhe

Print

.

This prompt also appears when no measuring leads are connected to the tester. In this case, just confirm with the "OK" button.

Page 160: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50519-6 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

Diagnostic bus 1. In order to execute a self-test of the diagnostic bus, select "Diagnostic bus unit" in the function list. The prompt appears:

Disconnect diagnostic cable from tester.

Confirm with the "OK" button when you have disconnected the diagnostic cable from the tester.

2. After a few seconds, the following prompt appears:

Connect diagnostic cable to tester(not connected to vehicle).

When you connect a diagnostic cable to the tester, leave the test probe wit-hout contact.

3. The result of the self-test will appear in the right portion of the work window after a few seconds.

.

This prompt appears even if no diagnostic cables are connected to the tester. In this case, just confirm with the "OK" button.

.

When a diagnostic cable is connected during a "Diagnostic bus" self-test, short-circuits in the cable are detected. Further self-tests of the diagnostic cable are not available.

Page 161: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

Operating Manual VAS 50519-7C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

9.6 Enter Workshop Code/Change Dealership Identifier

Entry of the work-shop code (initial startup)

If you activate the "Enter workshop code" function from the function list in the "Administration" mask during initial startup of the VAS 5051, you can enter your VZ/importer number, your dealership number and your dealership identifier. You will find more information on initial startup of a new - or replaced - tester in chapter 3.

Change dealership identifier

When the VZ/importer number and dealership number input has been confirmed, the data are blocked for the dealer. The next time the tester is switched on the "Enter workshop code" function is replaced by "Change dealership identifier". Only the dealership identifier can be changed subsequently

9.7 Signal Generator

The tester will emit a signal tone for certain events, e.g. the continuity test in the test instruments or faulty entries on a virtual keyboard. You can set the duration and tone pitch of this signal in the "Signal generator" function. The setting has no influence on the "Battery low" alarm.

When you select the "Signal generator" function in the function list, the follow-ing mask appears (see fig. 9-3):

Fig. 9-3 "Signal generator" mask

You can change the signal tone with the two slide controls. The numerical values above the slide control indicate the values just set.

Duration [ms]

30000

760

Tonhöhe

40000

2000

Go to Help

AdministrationSignal generatorAdministration

Adjust signal generator

Tone pitch [Hz]

Equipment number: 12345VZ/Importer number: 678Dealership number: 98765 V.A.G. Partner Siemensallee 50, 76187 Karlsruhe

Print

Page 162: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50519-8 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

• With the top slide control labeled "Duration", you can change the time for which the signal lasts. You can set values between 0 (far left setting) and 3,000 ms (far right setting).

• The bottom slide control labeled "Tone pitch" controls the frequency of the signal tone. You can set values between 0 (far left setting) and 4.000 Hz (far right setting).

As you move the slide control, the tester emits a signal tone at the last set tone pitch/duration. When the setting has been made the signal is generated every time the touchscreen is operated until the next time the device is switched off.

9.8 Date/time

When you select the "Date/time" function from the function list, the following mask appears (see fig. 9-4):

Fig. 9-4 "Date/time" mask, setting the hour

Here you can set the date and time of the operating system to the appropriate val-ues.

Date The date appears in the sequence: Day - Month - Year. If you press one of the but-tons to the left and right of the date display, the date setting will change by one day.

.

The volume of the signal tone cannot be changed.

AdministrationAdministrationDate/time

Set correct date and time.

Date

Time

Day Month Year

Hour Minute

Go to Help

7

Equipment number: 12345VZ/Importer number: 678Dealership number: 98765 V.A.G. Partner Siemensallee 50, 76187 Karlsruhe

11 728 199707

Print

Page 163: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

Operating Manual VAS 50519-9C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

The left button sets the date back one day.

The right button advances the date one day.

Time You can set the hour and minute independently of each other. Therefore, hours and minutes are shown on two separately selectable buttons in the "Time" area.

Set hour If you press the "Hour" button, two additional buttons appear to the left and right of the time display. You can use these buttons to set the hour display back or for-ward one hour.

The left button sets the hour display back by one hour.

The right button advances the hour display by one hour.

Set minutes If you press the "Minute" button, two additional buttons appear to the left and right of the time display. You can use these buttons to set the minute display back or forward by one minute. You make the settings in the same way as for the hour display.

Accept time display The newly set date and time settings are accepted into the operating system with the "Back" button.

You can exit the mask with the "Go to" button without changing the system time.

.

You cannot set the month and year with the two settings buttons. The month and year will change automatically if the date is changed to the beginning or end of a month or year. Therefore, you must press the right button 365 times in order to move the system date forward one year.

Page 164: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50519-10 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

9.9 Expanded Functions

This function is only available when you use special key CDs that are not distri-buted with the VAS 5051.

9.10 Select Initial Graphic

When you select the "Select initial graphic" function from the function list, you can select from a list the graphic you want to appear in the start mask of the tester. The list displayed on-screen shows the names under which the graphics are saved.

Select a graphic with the selection bar and exit the function with the "Back" but-ton. The selected graphic will appear as soon as you switch to the start mask.

9.11 Contents List

When you select the "Contents list" function from the function list, the mask dis-plays information about the system installed from the CD.

The display shows:

• The version and creation date of the CD

• Informations about the vehicle data contained on the CD

Devices with marque separation display the base and marque-specific CDs instal-led on the VAS 5051 with their respective versions in a follow-up dialogue box. Select the CD on which you want more details. Then the relevant contents file is displayed.

9.12 Print Format

When you select the "Print format" function, you can set the format for screen dumps and log printouts to

• DIN A4 or

• US Letter

size. Insert the appropriate size in the tray and adjust the guides (see fig. 3-1 and fig. 3-2).

At the next print job the printer will switch to the new format.

Page 165: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

Operating Manual VAS 50519-11C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

9.13 Installation or update of ESIS

You can use this function to install a CD for the "Electronic Service Information System" (only for the US market).

9.14 Activate telediagnosis

This function is preset for a future application.

When the option is selected the displayed entry in the function list switches to "Deactivate telediagnosis".

Page 166: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 50519-12 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Administration

Page 167: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Help

Operating Manual VAS 505110-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

10 Help

10.1 Overview

In "Help" mode you can access context-sensitive or general operating hints and explanations of function. "Help" does not replace the operating manual but it can help you if you are uncertain how to use certain masks or buttons so that you don’t have to look it up in the operating manual.

The help function is divided into two groups:

• Topics

• Buttons

10.2 Start Help

The "Help" button appears on every mask in the tester. It is always in the same place on the navigation bar. Press on it when you need more information about a mask or a button.

The tester remains in "Help" mode as long as the "Help" button appears pressed. You cannot change any settings or selections in this mode.

Exit "Help" mode by pressing on the "Help" button a second time.

Help

Help is open - the button is active Help is closed

Help Help

Page 168: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505110-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Help

10.3 Help Overview

The "Help overview" dialog box appears when you start "Help" mode. It contains a list of one or more topics for which a brief explanation is available (see fig. 10-1).

A selection bar highlights the current topic. You can move the bar to any entry in the list; the selected topic will be opened once you activate the touchscreen.

Fig. 10-1 Help overview in the "Test plan" mask, "Guided Fault Finding" mode

The "Close" button closes the "Help overview" so that you can see the buttons that might be hidden behind it. However, the tester remains in "Help" mode.

Help overview

Close

Use of buttons - press relevant button.Other subjects - by selection from following list. Press "Close" to display overlayed information.

Help on use of the maskHelp on test planHelp on function test

Page 169: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Help

Operating Manual VAS 505110-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

10.4 Help on Topics

The help text that you are shown when you open a topic explains the options you have in the current mask (for example, see fig. 10-2). There you can see what you can do in the mask as well as the links to others masks.

Fig. 10-2 Help on use of the "Test plan" mask, "Guided Fault Finding" mode

• The scroll bar on the right side of the dialog box can be used to scroll the text up or down so that you can read the whole text.

• The "Overview" button returns you to the "Help overview ".

• The "Close" button closes the Help dialog box so that you can see the other buttons that might be hidden behind it. However, the tester remains in "Help" mode.

Help on use of the mask

CloseOverview

Use of buttons - press relevant button.Press "Overview" to display the "Help Overview".

"Test Plan" Mask

Select test object:

This mask allows you to select and start test programmes. The test results of tests already conducted are displayed to the left of the test name.

VAS 5051 suggests the testing of a specific test object indicated by dark background). To accept this suggestion press "Continue" -

The Test Plan is recomputed every time the mask is accessed. Successful repairs and the deletion of fault characteristics affect the sequence of the tests

Page 170: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505110-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Help

10.5 Help on the Selected Button

You can get help for any button in any mask.

Press any button while the Tester is in "Help" mode and a brief explanation of the button’s meaning and use will appear on the mask (see fig. 10-3). Close the "Help overview " window if you need to see the buttons behind it.

Fig. 10-3 Help on the "Test Instruments" button

• The " Overview " button returns you to the "Help overview ".

• The "Close" button closes the "Help on button pressed" dialog box so that you can see the buttons behind it. However, the Tester remains in "Help" mo-de.

Help on button pressed

CloseOverview

Press "Close" to display overlayed information.Press "Overview" to display the "Help Overview".

"Test Instruments" button

Press this button tostart Test Instruments

.

No help is available for the "Overview" and "Help" buttons themselves.

Page 171: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Operating Manual VAS 505111-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

11 Troubleshooting

The VAS 5051 was tested before being shipped. Selected components and adhe-rence to specified quality controls guarantee that the VAS 5051 will be extremely dependable. However, if a problem should arise, consult the notes in this chapter before you contact Customer Service.

11.1 Classification

Trouble that the VAS 5051 may have can be classified into the following groups:

• Trouble stemming from ambient influences: ambient temperature, (extreme) humidity, dust, soot, grease, sparking, power supply, transformers, large electric motors, two-way radio equipment, vibration

• Trouble in the VAS 5051: tester, battery, workshop trolley, power distributi-on on the workshop trolley, measuring leads, printer, IrDA adapter.

Try to identify the problem and localize it if possible. Try the suggested solutions and carry out all the measures listed.

If the problem cannot be solved with the solutions provided, follow the instruc-tions in section 11.4.

Page 172: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505111-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

11.2 Self-test

11.2.1 Self-test for Computer Hardware

If error messages appear after this self-test, contact Customer Service. See section 11.4.

11.2.2 Self-test of the Test Instrument and the Diagnostic Bus Unit.

See section 9.5.

If error messages appear after this self-test, contact Customer Service. See section 11.4.

11.3 Symptoms, Causes and Solutions

11.3.1 Computer

.

The computer is tested every time the VAS 5051 is powered up. The tester is ready for use when the start mask is displayed and when the touchscreen is active.

Table 11-1 Computer error messages

Symptom Possible causes Solution

The system stops responding. Touchs-creen cannot be used to operate the system.

Internal error. Switch the tester off and back on again.

Battery not working. Battery defective Replace the battery as shown in section 12.2.3.

Error message: Non-System disk or disk error. Replace and strike any key when ready.

Diskette in the disk drive when the tester is switched on.

Remove the disk. Switch the tester off and back on again.

Error message: Fatal Error

System error. Switch the tester off. Send a fault report fax to SIEMENS as shown in section 11.4.

Red LED lit, tester swit-ches off after 10 s.

Tester overheating. Clean the air filter as shown in section 12.2.4.

Page 173: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Operating Manual VAS 505111-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Printer driver

Fig. 11-4 Printer driver

If you get this message, carry out the checks in the order given below and rectify the problem. Then press the "Retry" button. If you are unable to rectify the prob-lem, follow the instructions in section 11.3.4. If you press "Cancel", the print job will be deleted.

1. Is there an object in the IrDA interface (fig. 2-20)?

2. Is the IrDA adapter (fig. 2-20) in its fixture?

3. Is the printer switched on (7, fig. 2-18)?

4. Is the Centronics connector (fig. 2-19) properly connected to the printer?

5. Is the "Ready" indicator lit(fig. 2-22)? If not, press the ONLINE button (fig. 2-22).

11.3.2 Test Instruments

Table 11-2 Test Instruments error messages

Symptom Possible causes Solution

Error message: Measu-ring lead not properly connected or fuse defective.

Fuse for inline cur-rent is defective.

Replace the fuse on the top of the tester as shown in section 12.2.5.

Temporary over-load, due to induc-tive load for example. The inter-nal indestructible electronic fuse has tripped.

Press the "Repeat" button. If another error message appears, press the "Cancel" button.

The U/R/D lead is still plugged in at position "U/R/D".

Plug the lead into the correct socket.

In the resistance or con-tinuity test the error message: Measure-ment error: external feed occurs.

A voltage is being applied to the com-ponent under mea-surement.

Shut off the external voltage source.

Page 174: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505111-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

11.3.3 Measuring Leads

Before beginning a test of the measuring leads, you should perform the self-test for "Test Instruments" to exclude the possibility of a fault in the instrument. See section 9.5.

Some key error messages of the VAS 5051 are listed in the following table. If you identify a defect or if the measuring lead does not work despite a clean test, con-tact Customer Service.

.

The self-test for the test instruments does not include the measuring leads. They must be checked by means of the tests described in this section.

Table 11-3 Measuring lead error messages

Symptom Possible causes Solution

Error message: Dia-gnostic bus faulty in vehicle self-diagnosis and guided fault fin-ding.

Diagnostic cable not con-nected correctly or defec-tive.

Connect the tester to the vehicle via the diagnostic cable. Repeat the function test.

Inline current mea-surement not possible.

The U/R/D measuring lead is still plugged in at position "U/R/D".

Plug the measuring lead into the correct socket.

Fuse defective. Replace the fuse as shown in section 12.2.5.

Temporary overload, due to inductive load for example. The internal indestructible electronic fuse has tripped.

Press the "Repeat" button in the dialog box. If another error message appears, press the "Cancel" button.

Error message: Test probes not connected in inline current mea-surement.

During calibration of the inline current measure-ment, the test probes of the COM measuring lead and the U/R/D measuring lead were not intercon-nected.

Connect the test probes and recalibrate.

Page 175: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Operating Manual VAS 505111-5C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

U/R/D measuring lead and COM measuring lead

A function test of the U/R/D measuring lead and the COM measuring lead is per-formed as follows. If the test results do not conform to the required values, there is a fault in the lead concerned. In this case, send a fault report as shown in section 11.4.

1. Connect the measuring leads to the tester.

2. Activate the "Resistance U/R/D" button in the "Multimeter" mask in "Test Instruments" mode. Select automatic measurement range selection (see section 6.3).

3. If the test probes of the two measuring leads are not contacting, the following result should be displayed:

+++++ MΩ.

4. Now short the connection between the two test probes. The displayed result must be ≤ 10 Ω. If it is not, at least one of the measuring leads is probably defective.

Measure the line resistance to determine which of the measuring leads is defec-tive:

1. Disconnect the COM measuring lead from the "COM" socket.

2. On the screen, manually select the measurement range "0 .. 10 Ohm" (see section 6.3). The following prompt appears in a dialog box:

To calibrate connect U/R/D and COM test probes together.

3. Plug the test probe of the U/R/D measuring lead into the "COM" socket and press the OK button. The displayed measured value must be ≤ 0.03 Ω.

4. Check the freeze frame selection by pressing the button on the test probe. The measured value is frozen, the on-screen "Freeze frame" button must appear pressed.

5. Remove the U/R/D measuring lead and reconnect the COM measuring lead again. Plug the safety test probe into the "U/R/D" socket. The displayed mea-sured value must be ≤0.03 Ω.

Page 176: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505111-6 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

DSO measuring leads

A function test of the DSO measuring leads is performed as follows. If the test results do not conform to the required values, there is a fault in the DSO measur-ing lead concerned. In this case, send a fault report as shown in section 11.4.

1. Connect a DSO measuring lead to the DSO1 socket.

2. Touch the "Voltage DSO1" button in the "Multimeter" mask in "Test Instru-ments" mode. Select the "Direct voltage" measurement type and automatic measurement range selection (see section 6.3).

3. Connect the test probes of the DSO measuring lead to a charged auto battery. The displayed measured value must correspond to the battery voltage (bet-ween 11 and 14 V).

4. Check the freeze frame selection by pressing the button on the test probe. The measured value is frozen, the on-screen "Freeze frame" button must appear pressed.

Now perform a comparative test between U/R/D and DSO:

1. Unfreeze the freeze frame by touching the button again to resume the measu-rements.

2. Also connect the U/R/D measuring lead and the COM measuring lead to the tester and the auto battery. You should first check the proper function capa-bility of both measuring leads.

3. Touch the "Voltage U/R/D" button. Select the "Direct voltage" measurement type and automatic measurement range selection (see section 6.3).

4. The difference between the measured values should be ≤ 0.2 V in both the displayed measurement functions (DSO1 and U/R/D).

Repeat the function test with the second DSO measuring lead.

.

Both the DSO measuring leads are identical and can be interchanged for testing.

Page 177: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Operating Manual VAS 505111-7C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Current pick-up 50 A A function test of the current pick-up 50 A is performed as follows: If the test results do not conform to the required values, there is a fault in the current pick-up. In this case, send a fault report as shown in section 11.4.

1. Connect the current pick-up 50 A to the tester.

2. Touch the "Current 50A current pick-up" button in the "Multimeter" mask in "Test Instruments" mode. Select the "Direct current" measurement type and automatic measurement range selection (see section 6.3).

3. Open and close the current pick-up several times without connecting it to a live electrical cable. The measured value must change significantly between the two conditions. When the pick-up is open, this message appears in the display window at the top right:

Current pick-up not closed.

Check the calibration of the current pick-up:

1. Press the "Calibrate" button on the screen. Ignore the message in the dialog box which appears, and press the "OK" button to close it. The measured value displayed must now be ≤ 0.05 A.

2. Connect the current pick-up to a battery cable or another cable of a power consumer in a vehicle. All consumers and the vehicle ignition should be off initially. The displayed measurement result must be ≤ 1 A.

Perform a comparative test:

1. Switch on a < 50 A consumer, such as the parking lights. The current con-sumption should be as exactly known as possible. Use this as an empirical va-lue. The measured value must match the empirical value.

2. Disconnect the current pick-up from the live cable, rotate it through 180 degrees and reconnect it. The difference in measured values must be ≤ 0.5 A, but the preceding sign must be inverted.

Page 178: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505111-8 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Current pick-up 500 A

A function test of the current pick-up 500 A is performed as follows: If the test results do not conform to the required values, there is a fault in the current pick-up. In this case, send a fault report as shown in section 11.4.

1. Connect the current pick-up 500 A to the tester.

2. Touch the "Current 500A current pick-up" button in the "Multimeter" mask in "Test Instruments" mode. Select the "Direct current" measurement type and automatic measurement range selection (see section 6.3).

3. Open and close the current pick-up several times without connecting it to a live electrical cable. The measured value must change as the condition chan-ges.

Check the calibration of the current pick-up:

1. Press the "Calibrate" button on the screen. Ignore the message in the dialog box which appears, and press the "OK" button to close it. The measured value displayed must now be ≤ 0.5 A.

2. Connect the current pick-up to a battery cable or another cable of a power consumer in a vehicle. All consumers and the vehicle ignition should be off initially. The displayed measurement result must be ≤ 5 A.

Perform a comparative test:

1. Switch on a heavy power consumer, such as the lights and the heated rear window. The current consumption should be as exactly known as possible. Use this as an empirical value. The measured value must match the empirical value.

2. Disconnect the current pick-up from the live cable, rotate it through 180 de-grees and reconnect it. The difference in measured values must be ≤ 5 A, but the preceding sign must be inverted.

Page 179: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Operating Manual VAS 505111-9C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Trigger pick-up and kV pick-up

The only way to check these two pick-ups is together. The function test is per-formed as follows: If the test results do not conform to the required values, there is a fault in one of the pick-ups. In this case, send a fault report as shown in section 11.4.

1. Connect the trigger pick-up and the kV pick-up to the tester.

2. Call up the "DSO" mask in "Test Instruments" mode (see section 6.4).

3. Connect both pick-ups to a vehicle with a 4- or 6-cylinder engine by the same ignition cable (secondary side of the ignition coil).

4. Press the "Default measurement" button in the "DSO" mask. Select the "Ca-ble test kV TZ" curve in the selection box that appears, then press the "Dis-play" button to confirm. The "DSO" mask appears with the target curve in the background. At the same time all of the DSO settings are performed automa-tically.

5. Start the vehicle’s engine. The typical ignition signal similar to the target cur-ve must be dynamically displayed – that is, the mask is refreshed once or twice per second if the kV pick-up and the trigger pick-up are fault-free.

If the trigger pick-up is defective, this message appears in the box at the top right:

No trigger.

If the kV pick-up is defective, you may see only a horizontal line or a measure-ment curve with a much too low amplitude.

.

Depending on the vehicle, the amplitude of the ignition signal can fluctuate between 4 and 40 kV. The sparking voltage is typically between 600 and 1200 V, the combustion period may be between 2 and 6 ms. The shape of the curve may vary depending on ignition coil manufacturer.

Page 180: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505111-10 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

3 meter, 5 meter dia-gnostic cable

The function test of a diagnostic cable is performed as follows:

If the test results do not conform to the required values, there is a fault in the diagnostic cable. If this is the case, you should send a fault report as shown in section 11.4.

1. Connect the tester to a vehicle by the diagnostic cable.

2. Switch to "Vehicle self-diagnosis" mode and select the "Engine electronics" vehicle system (see section 5.3).

3. Switch the ignition on. If the connections are working data on the vehicle sy-stem variant will be displayed on the right side of the mask after a few secon-ds. If there is a break in the K-wire or the L-wire, the following message appears in the top left corner of the mask.

Vehicle not available.

If there is a break in the supply wire in a 3 meter diagnostic cable, this message appears:

No voltage or voltage too low on diagnostic bus.

.

The diagnostic cable and diagnostic adapter function tests described below may only be performed on fault-free vehicles, to ensure that tests return logical results.

.

When testing the 3 meter diagnostic cable, the tester should always be powered by way of the diagnostic cable from the vehicle electrical system (no mains power connection to the tester) so that the supply leads to the tester can also be tested. If the top LED on the tester is lit up in green, the connection is OK. If the LED is lit up or flashing yellow, the cable is defective.

Page 181: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Operating Manual VAS 505111-11C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Diagnostic adapter A diagnostic adapter function test is performed as follows:

If the test results do not conform to the required values, there is a fault in the diagnostic adapter. If this is the case, you should send in a fault report as shown in section 11.4.

1. Connect the tester to a vehicle via a fault-free 3 meter diagnostic cable and the diagnostic adapter.

2. Switch to "Vehicle self-diagnosis" mode and select the "Engine electronics" vehicle system (see section 5.3).

3. Switch the ignition on. If the connections are working data on the vehicle sy-stem variant will be displayed on the right side of the mask after a few secon-ds. If there is a break in the K-wire or the L-wire, the following message appears in the top left corner of the mask.

Vehicle not available.

If there is a break in the supply wire in the diagnostic adapter, this message appears:

No voltage or voltage too low on diagnostic bus.

Page 182: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505111-12 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Diagnostic cable LT A diagnostic cable LT function test is performed as follows:

1. Connect the tester to a vehicle via the diagnostic cable LT.

2. Switch to "Vehicle Self-Diagnosis" mode and select the "Engine electronics" vehicle system (see section 5.3).

3. Switch the ignition on. If the connections are working data on the vehicle sy-stem variant will be displayed on the right side of the mask after a few secon-ds. If there is a break in the K-wire or the L-wire, the following message appears in the top left corner of the mask.

Vehicle not available.

If there is a break in the supply wire in the LT diagnostic cable, this message appears:

No voltage or voltage too low on diagnostic bus.

If the measurement results do no conform to the required values, there is a fault in the diagnostic cable LT. If this is the case, you should send in a fault report as shown in section 11.4.

Page 183: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Operating Manual VAS 505111-13C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

11.3.4 Printer

Paper jam Paper may get jammed at different points along the paper path in the printer. If there is a paper jam, the printer will return an error message localizing the paper jam. Possible error messages are listed in the following table:

Paper feed jam To clear a jam in the printer’s input area:

1. Remove the paper cassette from the printer as shown in section 4.5.

2. Remove the sheet from the printer and check the sheets still in the cassette. Remove any creased sheets and straighten the stack of paper.

3. Replace the paper cassette.

4. Press both the release buttons (see fig. 2-18) then open and shut the printer casing briefly to signal to the printer that the offending sheet has been remo-ved.

Printing resumes.

Paper jam downst-ream of paper feed

To clear the paper jam:

1. Press both the release buttons and open the printer casing.

2. Remove the drum unit as shown in section 12.5.2 and carefully remove the paper from the printer.

3. Pull the paper toward you and the front of the printer, away from the paper feed direction. Also check the output area and the paper feed.

4. Replace the drum unit as shown in section 12.5.2.

5. Make sure that the remaining sheets or envelopes are not creased or misali-gned.

6. Close the printer casing; the print job resumes.

Output Jam To clear a paper jam in the output area:

1. Press both release buttons and open the printer casing to make it easier to re-move the sheet from the paper output area.

2. Remove the jammed paper carefully from the printer.

Shut the printer casing until both sides lock in.

Table 11-4 Paper jam

Printer error message Cause

BIN1 INPUTJAM Paper jam in the paper feed

BIN1 PAPERJAM Paper jam downstream of the paper feed.

OUTPUTJAM Paper jam at the paper output.

Page 184: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505111-14 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Toner If there are areas of faded print or if the print quality diminishes, the toner cartridge is empty. A sensor in the printer reacts when the toner is used up. When this hap-pens, the display panel shows the message "TONER" or "T.OUT". Replace the to-ner as soon as possible, as shown in section 12.5.1.

Drum If the Error message "DRUM?" appears in the display panel, the image drum unit is not installed correctly. Remove the drum unit from the printer and put it back in as shown in section 12.5.2. Pay careful attention to the instructions given there re-garding handling of the drum unit.

Printing a test page Switch the printer to OFF-LINE status by pressing the ON-LINE button. Then press the FORM FEED/Print Demo button until the message "PRINTING DE-MO" appears in the display. The test page is printing. Finally, switch the printer back on again (ON-LINE).

IrDA adapter If the LED of the IrDA adapter does not behave as described in section 2.2.5, try the following:

1. Make sure the printer is switched on.

2. Check the IrDA adapter to make sure it is correctly seated on the tester and printer sides (see fig. 2-20).

If you cannot solve the problem, you should send in a fault report as shown in section 11.4.

Page 185: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Operating Manual VAS 505111-15C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

11.4 Fault Reports to Customer Service

If the problem cannot be fixed, please contact Customer Service. table 11-5 indi-cates who you should contact. Lists of authorized service centers are given in chapter 14.

.

The fastest way to send your fault report to Customer Service is by fax. Use a copy of the fault report form contained in the chapter 14 and send it to the fax number for your authorized Customer Service Center which you will find in chapter 14. Describe the fault characteristics (message, etc.) as precisely as pos-sible, when it occurred and what you were doing when it occurred, what you have done to localize the problem (section 11.3) and the results of your actions.

Table 11-5 Contacts

Component/Subject Contact

Tester SIEMENS

Workshop trolley SIEMENS

Measuring leads SIEMENS

Operating manual SIEMENS

Printer SIEMENS

Operating problems SIEMENS

Unidentifiable problem SIEMENS

Using the VAS 5051 on the vehicle

SIEMENS

Printer consumables (drum unit and toner cartridge)

Your local OKI distributor or OKI

Page 186: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505111-16 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

11.5 Exchanging Components

11.5.1 Tester

If the tester (not including the power cable) needs to be exchanged, you will receive a replacement machine in a special container that you must use to return the defective machine.

Leads Defective measuring leads are replaced complete. If you have to exchange the power cable, please read the assembly instructions in section 3.2.

Battery Switch the tester off and remove it from its mounting on the workshop trolley as shown in section 4.3.

Exchange the battery as shown in section 12.2.3.

Dispose of the old battery in accordance with your local waste disposal regula-tions.

IrDA adapter The cable for the IrDA adapter is attached to the workshop trolley by a strain relief tie which is not included with a replacement part.

1. Remove the IrDA adapter from the workshop trolley by pulling it out to the open side of its fixing.

2. Pull the cable on the workshop trolley from the duct on the side member (keep the rubber parts).

3. Remove the round plastic cap from the side panel behind the right side mem-ber of the trolley.

4. Detach the Centronics connector from the printer.

5. Remove the IrDA adapter.

Mount the new IrDA adapter by carrying out steps 1 to 5 in reverse order.

11.5.2 Workshop Trolley

The workshop trolley is not a replaceable part. However, you can order parts to repair the Workshop trolley as shown in the appendix: "Parts List VAS 5051".

Page 187: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Troubleshooting

Operating Manual VAS 505111-17C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

11.6 Parts List

11.6.1 Contents

During the warranty period, we will repair the VAS 5051 by exchanging defined components. Your local Customer Service representative will be able to tell you which component needs to be replaced when you have sent in your fault report. The warranty guarantors will then send you one or more replacement parts.

Exchange parts, consumables, repair parts

Some components of the VAS 5051 are exchange parts that you must return in exchange for a new component. We will give you the address to which the defec-tive exchange part should be sent if needed.

You can dispose of consumables yourself. Please follow your local waste dis-posal regulations.

You can order repair parts from the supplier and then perform the exchange on your own.

The appendix to this chapter lists all the exchange parts and indicates whether the item is an exchange, a consumable or a repair part.

In critical cases the guarantors may also demand the return of parts not normally subject to mandatory return.

Appendix to the Chapter: "Parts List VAS 5051"

Page 188: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendix to Chapter "Troubleshooting"

Operating Manual VAS 5051Page: 1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Parts list VAS 5051

6HULDO

QR

'HVLJQDWLRQ ,QFOXGHG

(886$6SHFLDO

9$6QR 0DQXIDFWXUHU

QXPEHU

9:QXPEHU 9HQGRU 7\SH 5HPDUNV

7HVWHU

7HVWHU9$6 (8YHUVLRQ l l &$$ 6,(0(16 $

D 7HVWHU9$6 (8YHUVLRQ .(%$ 6,(0(16 ( 2QO\LIWHVWHULVLUUHSDUDEOH

7HVWHUVAS 505186$YHUVLRQ l &$$ 6,(0(16 $

D 7HVWHU9$6 86$YHUVLRQ .(%% 6,(0(16 ( 2QO\LIWHVWHULVLUUHSDUDEOH

$LUILOWHU l l l &$' =:( 6,(0(169: ( $VUHSODFHPHQWSDUWSLHFHVZLWKFRYHU

)XVHV,QOLQHFXUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW l l l &$' =:( 6,(0(169: ( $VUHSODFHPHQWSDUWSLHFHV

%DWWHU\SDFN9 l l l &$' =:( 6,(0(169: ( $VUHSODFHPHQWSDUWLQFOXGLQJIRDPSDGGLQJ

&DEOHV

,U'$DGDSWHU l l l &$% =:( 6,(0(169: (

'LDJQRVWLFFDEOHP l l &$% =:( 6,(0(169: (

&RPERGLDJQRVWLFFDEOHP l &$% =:( 6,(0(169: ( ,QDFFRPSDQ\LQJSDFN

'LDJQRVWLFFDEOHP l l &$% =:( 6,(0(169: (

&RPERGLDJQRVWLFFDEOHP l &$% =:( 6,(0(169: (

'LDJQRVWLFDGDSWHU l l l &$% =:( 6,(0(169: ( ,QDFFRPSDQ\LQJSDFN

'LDJQRVWLFFDEOH/7 l l &$% =:( 6,(0(169: ( ,QDFFRPSDQ\LQJSDFN

85'PHDVXULQJOHDG l l l &$' =:( 6,(0(169: ( 0HDVXULQJOHDGVHW

&20PHDVXULQJOHDG l l l &$% =:( 6,(0(169: (

'62PHDVXULQJOHDGVDQG l l l &$% =:( 6,(0(169: (

&XUUHQWSLFNXS$ m m m &$% =:( 6,(0(169: (

&XUUHQWSLFNXS$ m m m &$% =:( 6,(0(169: (

N9SLFNXS m m m &$% =:( 6,(0(169: (

Page 189: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendix to Chapter "Troubleshooting"

Operating Manual VAS 5051Page: 2C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

3ULQWHUV

3ULQWHU2/H[(8YHUVLRQ3ULQWHU2.,3$*(H[(8YHUVLRQ

l &$%$(

6,(0(16 $

D 3ULQWHU2/H[(8YHUVLRQ3ULQWHU2.,3$*(H[(8YHUVLRQ

.(%&.(%(

6,(0(16 ( RQO\LISULQWHULVLUUHSDUDEOH

3ULQWHU2/H[86$YHUVLRQ3ULQWHU2.,3$*(H[86$YHUVLRQ

l l &$%$(

6,(0(16 $

D 3ULQWHU2/H[86$YHUVLRQ3ULQWHU2.,3$*(H[86$YHUVLRQ

.(%'.(%)

6,(0(16 ( RQO\LISULQWHULVLUUHSDUDEOH

,PDJHGUXPXQLWIRUSULQWHU2/H[,PDJHGUXPXQLWIRUSULQWHU2.,3$*(H[

l l l 26'1R26'1R

=:(=:(

2.,9: (

7RQHUIRUSULQWHU2/H[7RQHUIRUSULQWHU2.,3$*(H[

l l l 26'1R26'1R

=:(=:(

2.,9: (

:RUNVKRSWUROOH\

:RUNVKRSWUROOH\(8YHUVLRQ l =:( .1h559: 5

:RUNVKRSWUROOH\86$YHUVLRQ l l 08/&6$

=:( .1h559: 5

$FU\OLFJODVVFRYHUIRUSULQWHU l l l .1h55 (

5DPSURWHFWLRQEDU l l l .1h55 (

'UDZHUEORFNFRPSOHWH l l l .1h55 (

6HWRIUROOHUVUROOHUVZLWKVWRSSHU l l l .1h55 (

6HWRIUROOHUVUROOHUVZLWKRXWVWRSSHU l l l .1h55 (

6PDOOSODVWLFSDUWVSDFNVSURILOHFRYHUFDSVFDEOHUHWUDFWRUNQREVSULQWHUIL[WXUHVVLGHERG\LQVHUWVGUDZHUKDQGOH

l l l .1h55 (

+DQJHUEORFNOHIWULJKWIRUPHDVXULQJOHDGV l l l .1h55 (

'HHSGUDZLQJHOHPHQWIRUGUDZHU l l l .1h55 (

WHOHVFRSLFWUDFNVIRUGUDZHU l l l .1h55 (

'UDZHULQGLYLGXDOIURQWIDFLQJZLWKKDQGOHDQGPHWDOUHFHVV

l l l .1h55 (

&DSIRUOHIWUROOHUDUP l l l .1h55 (

6HULDO

QR

'HVLJQDWLRQ ,QFOXGHG

(886$6SHFLDO

9$6QR 0DQXIDFWXUHU

QXPEHU

9:QXPEHU 9HQGRU 7\SH 5HPDUNV

Page 190: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendix to Chapter "Troubleshooting"

Operating Manual VAS 5051Page: 3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

&DSIRUULJKWUROOHUDUP l l l .1h55 (

$UWLFXODWHGWLOWMRLQWZLWKFRXQWHUVXQNVFUHZV l l l .1h55 (

3RZHUGLVWULEXWRUVWR9'(VWDQGDUGZLWKH[WHUQDOFDEOHPQRQKHDWLQJDSSOLDQFHVRFNHWDQGJURXQGLQJSOXJ

l .1h55 (

3RZHUGLVWULEXWRUWR8/VWDQGDUGZLWKH[WHUQDOFDEOHPQRQKHDWLQJDSSOLDQFHVRFNHWDQG8/SOXJ

l l .1h55 (

'XVWFRYHU l l l =:( .1h559: (

'RFXPHQWDWLRQ

2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO9$6 ZLWKILOH l l l .([[ 6,(0(16 ( [[ ODQJXDJHNH\VHHODVWSDJHRIRSHUDWLQJPDQXDO

Table 11-6 Key to symbols

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Standard A Replacement part

Accessory E Consumer unit

- Not available R Repair part

6HULDO

QR

'HVLJQDWLRQ ,QFOXGHG

(886$6SHFLDO

9$6QR 0DQXIDFWXUHU

QXPEHU

9:QXPEHU 9HQGRU 7\SH 5HPDUNV

Page 191: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendix to Chapter "Troubleshooting"

Operating Manual VAS 5051Page: 4C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Figure 11-5 Measuring leads with index to parts list

7. Diagnostic cable 5 m8. Combo diagnostic cable 5 m9. Diagnostic cable 3 m10. Combo diagnostic cable 3 m

18. kV pick-up

11. Diagnostic adapter 19. Trigger pick-up

12. Diagnostic cable LT

13. U/R/D measuring lead

14. COM measuring lead

15. DSO measuring lead

16. Current pick-up 50 A17. Current pick-up 500 A

DSO 2

Stromzange 50A

C79298-A3238-B525-51

SIEMENS

Page 192: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendix to Chapter "Troubleshooting"

Operating Manual VAS 5051Page: 5C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Figure 11-6 Workshop trolley with index to parts list; 33-34, 39-41 shown above

Note

Instructions for removal and replacement are delivered with the replacement parts for the workshop trolley (No. 26 - 41).

35

35

33

31

30

32

40 40

41

35

35

35

42

34

36

35

36

35

Page 193: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

Operating Manual VAS 505112-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

12 Care and Maintenance

12.1 Visual Check of the VAS 5051

You should carry out a visual check of the VAS 5051 on a regular basis. Check all parts for damage (e.g. fractures) and dirt contamination.

Check the touchscreen carefully for damage or dirt. Clean as shown in section 12.2.1 as necessary.

Regularly check all cables for damage.

12.2 Tester

If the casing is dirty, clean it with a non-fluffing damp (not wet!) cloth.

If the tester is damaged, contact the SIEMENS hotline (see section 14.2).

+

Always replace damaged cables.

+

Before cleaning the tester, as a safety measure switch it off and unplug it! Unplug all measuring leads. Be sure that no liquid gets into the casing. Do not try to clean the internal parts of the CD and floppy disk drives.

Page 194: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505112-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

12.2.1 Cleaning the Touchscreen

The most sensitive component of the tester is the touchscreen. Its sensitivity to touch can be reduced by dirt or scratches. If it is dirty, clean it with a soft (as far as possible non-fluffing) cloth. If this fails to remove the dirt, you can use isopro-pyl alcohol or ammonia-free glass cleaner.

12.2.2 Forming the Battery

The battery has a typical lifespan of approx. 500 charge/discharge cycles. This can only be achieved if – whenever possible - you discharge the battery fully in every cycle, and if you form the battery once a month (that is, run it down and recharge it).

The battery should also be formed if the VAS 5051 has not been used for a long period of time, because the battery will self-discharge during that time.

To form the battery:

1. Disconnect the mains power from the tester without switching it off.

2. Leave the tester on until all the LEDs go out: the battery is now discharged.

3. Switch the tester off.

4. Plug it in to the mains to recharge the battery. It takes about 2 hours to charge it completely.

If the standby runtime of the battery falls below 30 minutes even after being formed repeatedly, it must be replaced.

+

Always replace a defective battery with a new battery. Never operate the unit without an installed battery.

Page 195: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

Operating Manual VAS 505112-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

12.2.3 Changing the Battery

You can find the order number and supplier of this consumable in section 11.6.

Change the battery as shown below:

1. Switch the tester off properly and unplug the power cable.

2. Lay the tester down on a level, clean, open surface with the screen facing down so that it cannot be damaged.

3. Open up the quick-release screw (fig. 12-1) using a slotted screwdriver (turning no more than 90° counterclockwise!).

4. Lift the cover of the battery compartment and take it off.

Fig. 12-1 Opening the battery compartment

5. Push the black plastic foam pad in the battery compartment to the left and re-move

6. Disconnect the connector from the battery cable. Press down the retaining spring in the middle of the two connector sections with your thumbnail and pull the sections apart (see fig. 12-2).

Fig. 12-2 Detaching the connector from the battery cable

Quick-release screw for the battery compartment

press here

Page 196: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505112-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

7. Replace the old battery with a new one.

8. Reconnect the connector. The plug must engage in the socket.

9. Replace the plastic foam padding in the compartment

10. Store the connecting cable with the connector in the battery compartment.

11. Take the cover and position it with its back edge under the panel of the sheet-metal casing. Close down the quick-release screw (fig. 12-1) using a slotted screwdriver (turning no more than 90° clockwise!).

12.2.4 Changing the Air Filter

If the red LED signals overheating, and in any case at least every three months, the air filter must be changed as a preventive measure.

1. Turn the tester off properly and unplug the power cable.

2. Lay the tester down on a level, clean, open surface with the screen facing down so that it cannot be damaged.

3. Open up the quick-release screw(fig. 12-3) using a slotted screwdriver (turning no more than 90° counterclockwise!).

Fig. 12-3 Removing the air filter

4. Remove the cover.

5. Pull out the filter.

.

Dispose of the battery in an environmentally friendly way.

Quick-release screwfor the air filter

Page 197: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

Operating Manual VAS 505112-5C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

6. Install the new filter.

7. Take the cover and position it with its back edge under the panel of the sheet-metal casing. Close down the quick-release screw (fig. 12-3) using a slotted screwdriver (turning no more than 90° clockwise!).

8. Switch on the tester.

If the red LED remains on, there is probably a fault. Send a fault report to the SIE-MENS Service Center (see section 11.4).

12.2.5 Changing the Fuse for Inline Current Measurement

The fuse on the top side of the tester breaks the current when the inline current measurement rises above 10 A. A replacement fuse is included with the tester when it is shipped.

To change the fuse:

1. Unscrew the cap from the fuse box (see fig. 12-4 ). The fuse is in the cap.

2. Remove the defective fuse.

Fig. 12-4 Removing the fuse

3. Place the new fuse in the cap.

4. Screw the cap back into the fuse box.

Cap of theFuse Box

+

Replace a defective fuse only with the original fuse included with the tester. Damage resulting from incorrect replacement fuses is not covered under the warranty.

Page 198: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505112-6 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

12.3 Workshop Trolley

The workshop trolley is maintenance-free.

12.4 Measuring Leads

Check all measuring leads for damage on a regular basis. Replace damaged leads.

12.5 Printer

Care and maintenance of the printer generally relates only to cleaning and con-sumption of toner and the drum unit. You do not need to grease or oil the printer mechanism.

The drum is a highly sensitive component. It has been protected against damage as much as possible. Nevertheless, you must handle it with the greatest possible care to keep it functioning properly.

+

Do not touch the green surface on the drum.Do not expose the drum to light for more than five minutes.Protect the drum against scratching.

+

The heating unit within the printer gets very hot during printing. You may burn your hands if you touch it. Wait until the heating unit has cooled before opening the printer casing.

+

Toner should not get on skin or clothing. If this does happen, use only cold water to remove the toner. Hot water could cause the toner to stick to skin or clothing.

Page 199: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

Operating Manual VAS 505112-7C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

12.5.1 Changing the Toner Cartridge

You can find the order number and supplier of the end-user part in section 11.6.

Change the toner cartridge as follows:

1. Press the release buttons on either side of the printer cover (see fig. 2-18) and open it upward.

2. Pull the blue plastic catch on the right side of the toner cartridge toward you to release it (see fig. 12-5). Lift out the toner cartridge.

Fig. 12-5 Catch on toner cartridge

3. Unpack the new cartridge. Sealing tape on the underside of the cartridge pre-vents toner from running out. Remove the entire length of the tape.

4. With the opening facing down, insert the toner cartridge into the left side of the cartridge tray in the drum unit. The blue catch on the toner cartridge must be on the right. Press it into the tray until it lies flat in the printer.

5. Using a little bit of force, move the blue catch back all the way to lock the toner cartridge in the printer.

6. Clean the LED array as shown in section 12.5.3.

Page 200: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505112-8 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

12.5.2 Changing the Drum Unit

If you see the message "Drum?" in the display field or if the print quality dimin-ishes, the drum unit should be changed at the next opportunity.

You can find the order number and supplier of this consumable in section 11.6.

Exchange the unit as follows:

1. Press the release buttons on either side of the printer cover (see fig. 2-18) and open it upward.

Fig. 12-6 Removing the drum unit

2. Holding the drum unit at the front, lift it out of the printer together with the toner cartridge (see fig. 12-6).

3. Unpack the new drum unit, remove the foam packing and the white protecti-ve paper stuffing. Keep the foam packing in case you need it for transporta-tion.

4. Install the new drum unit. It must lie securely and level in the recess provided.

5. Install the toner cartridge as described in section 12.5.1.

Page 201: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

Operating Manual VAS 505112-9C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

6. Close the cover so that the release buttons lock.

7. Reset the drum unit counter:

− Hold down the "Menu 1/Menu 2" button on the button panel while swit-ching on the printer. The message "SERVICE1" appears in the display pa-nel.

− Press the "Menu 1/Menu 2" button three times. The function "RESET DRUM" must appear in the display field.

− Press the "Enter" button. After a short time, you see "ON-LINE HP4" in the display field.

8. Pack the old drum in the packing material of the new one and return it to your supplier. The drum will be recycled.

If the drum is not installed correctly, the printer will show this in the display field with the message "DRUM?".

12.5.3 Cleaning the LED Array

The LED array on the underside of the cover can become dirty when changing toner cartridges, or simply over time. Clean it as needed, but especially after

changing the toner cartridge, using the cleaning cloth included with every new toner cartridge (see fig. 12-7). You can also use a soft, non-fluffing cloth and a cleaning agent such as isopropyl alcohol, for example.

Fig. 12-7 Cleaning the LED array

+

The LED array may be damaged if you use an unsuitable cleaning agent.

Page 202: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505112-10 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

12.5.4 Cleaning the Drum

If unused toner has settled on the drum, you can remove it using an internal cleaning procedure.

1. Switch the printer off-line by pressing the ON-LINE button.

2. Hold down both the/ /#/ /buttons simultaneously for more than two seconds until you see this message in the display field: "Clean, Add A4 Paper Manually".

3. Open the manual paper feed by pressing on the two markings and pulling it down.

Fig. 12-8 Inserting a sheet in the manual paper feed

4. Insert a DIN A4 sheet of paper in the manual paper feed. The printer draws it in automatically (see fig. 12-8). In the display panel you see the message "CLEAN PRINTER". The excess toner will come off on the cleaning sheet unevenly and the printer will print the words "The drum unit has been cleaned".

5. After the page has come out, switch the printer back on-line by pressing the ON-LINE button.

+

You cannot clean the drum by hand.

Page 203: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

Operating Manual VAS 505112-11C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

12.5.5

Page 204: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505112-12 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Care and Maintenance

12.5.6 Cleaning the Printing Mechanism

To ensure that your printer operates smoothly, you should clean the printing mechanism as needed (at least every six months).

1. Remove the drum unit as shown in section 12.5.2. Pack it so that it is not ex-posed to any light.

2. Remove any leftover paper or dust with a soft brush or pencil brush. Do not use any solvents or strong cleaning agents.

3. Excess toner residue can only be removed with a vacuum cleaner fitted with a microfilter. Household vacuum cleaners should not be used.

4. Refit the drum unit as shown in section 12.5.2.

12.5.7 Printer Settings

The printer is customized for use with the VAS 5051 tester and is configured be-fore being shipped. The settings are given in the appendix to this chapter.

12.6 Calibration

According to ISO 9000 ff., the accuracy of all measuring devices affecting the quality of a task performed - in this case a maintenance and repair task - must be calibrated periodically.

The tester together with the measuring leads is calibrated for three years (see cer-tificate, chapter 1). After that the calibration must be repeated every two years.

Please contact your representative before this time runs out.

Appendix to the Chapter: "Printer Settings"

Page 205: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

4!(,41/&1/0."10/06/7-(!1+#$ ('(1.((#((8/((/96:9

/ 4;

+

)/4 < 1

+

4;

Category Item FactoryEU-Version

FactoryUSA-Version and Special Version

/0."104&.=&1 -0 123 45 6' 45 6'"0&2141+" -101 7 377 377

515+7 +18 +181">1 229 :129 :129/&/10>1 +18 1'29 0.

-101 1'29 0. 1&"2/1 +18 -20- -20-

-101 -20- -20-/&/10>1+)1+3 515+29:4:; 1 1 +/1 :352

$."?2:4 7330+: +2 +273 2 27352:4 :52 :528-3 +!.) +!.)

/&14&2=" 1'5+2<24 ):3 0- ):3 0-<4251=;25 377 377:+7 :+ :+ 77 7 7

/&14&2=" 3+2123 53++12 53++12 25+51= (' 2 (' 2

/0."1 +3 023 3;2(# 3;2(#-3342= -20- -20-

102=&1 +1+077+ 103 103>(;%+:2?077+ 103 103>);%735+3:23 103 103>;%

&="/10&". 103:320 3 31036: 377 377

&03.1+."04 1+; /-10&. 53<+1?2= : :4-".10 3<3+ 3 3".10&. 3+1?2= 21 21 +41&0&:41-&0.. : 1+1 <1+2= 3 3/&0&44147$ 51+1 5 42=4 42=4

2.2+:23 1 1 2.5+2- 3 3

4&.=&1 1=01= =! "

Page 206: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

OKIPAGE10ex LED PAGE PRINTER Program ROM: P/W 02.10 EOO C745 Font 03.31 ENG 02.00 MSG L00.46,P00.47

PCL 00.53 PCLXL 00.50 SIDM 00.30 HD 00.07CAP_PU 02.20

Memory: :9

/ 4;

+

HP LaserJet 6P Emulation

+

4;

Category Item FactoryEU-Version

FactoryUSA-Version and Special Version

/0."104&.=&1 -0 123 103 103"0&2141+" -101 7 377 377

515+7 +18 +181">1 229 :129 :129/&/10>1 +18 1'29 0.

-101 1'29 0. 1&"2/1 +18 -20- -20-

-101 -20- -20-/&/10>1+)1+3 515+29:4:; 1 1 +/1 :352 1=0. 0+32= 21 21

$."?2:4 7330+: +2 +273 2 27352:4 :52 :528-3 5:.) 5:.)

/&14&2=" 1'5+2<24 ):3 0- ):3 0-<4251=;25 377 377:+7 :+ :+ 77 7 7

/&14&2=" 3+2123 53++12 53++12 25+51= (' 2 (' 2

)"."10$&+1 51+1 1 1

/0."1 +3 023 (# (#102=&1 +1+077+ 103>;% 103>;%

735+3:23 103>;% 103>;%&="/10&". 103:320 3 3

<122-30 *:3@ *:3-101 2-30 (:3 (:35+25+3:23 =33 =33

&03.1+."04 1+; /-10&. 53<+1?2= : :4-".10 3<3+ 3 3".10&. 3+1?2= 21 21 +41&0&:41-&0.. : 1+1 <1+2= 3 3100001/0" ++3++53+ 377 377/&0&44147$ 51+1 5 42=4 42=4

2.2+:23 1 1 2.5+2- 377 377

4&.=&1 1=01= =! "

Page 207: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Technical Data

Operating Manual VAS 505113-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

13 Technical Data

13.1 Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information SystemVAS 5051 with Workshop Trolley

13.2 Tester

13.2.1 Operating Data

Dimensions (W x D x H) 735 x 760 x 1.340 mm

Total weight 66 kg without packaging

72 kg with packaging

Totalelectrical connected loads

Name plate on theworkshop trolleyVAS 5051/230-V version

Name plate on theworkshop trolleyVAS 5051/120-V version

200 to 240 V / 4 A / 50/60 Hz

100 to 120 V / 9 A / 50/60 Hz

Dimensions (W x D x H) 380 x 310 x 110 mm

Weight 9 kg

Ambient conditions

Operation

Transportation and storage

Ambient temperature +5 to +45 °CRelative humidity 10 to 90 %,

non-condensing

Ambient temperature -20 to +60 °CRelative humidity 10 to 90 %,

non-condensing

AC power supply

Rated effective range(static)

Mains frequencies fN

Frequency range

The tester is generally supplied from the AC system. The battery is always charged from the AC system.

Voltage range 1 90 to 132 VVoltage range 2 180 to 264 V

50 Hz, 60 Hz

fN ±3 Hz

Page 208: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505113-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Technical Data

13.2.2 Test Instruments

Power supply from the vehicle electrical system

Rated voltages

12 V battery

24 V battery

Current consumption in theload range

Protection

The tester can be powered from the vehicle electrical system.

DC 12 V, DC 24 V

Supply on +12.7 V Σεχτιον 2 %

to +16 V Supply off +11,1 V Σεχτιον 2 % -4 %

Supply on +25.4 V Σεχτιον 2 %

to +36 VSupply off +22.2 V Σεχτιον 2 % -4 %

Approx. 7 A with 12 V battery voltage

The input is protected against disturbance varia-bles to DIN 40839 part 1, test pulses 1 to 4, test severity IV.

The input is protected against polarity rever-sal.

Power supplyfrom the battery

Battery type

Life expectancy

Buffer time

Recharge time(on mains)

If external power is interrupted and you are using a 5 m diagnostic cable (no power from the vehicle), the Tester will be buffered by the battery.

Nickel Cadmium, 12 V/2,8 Ah

More than 500 charge/discharge cycles

Min. 0.5 hours in standby mode of CD ROM and disk drives and of test instruments interface

Approx. 2 hours

Power cable The power cable (6 meters) can be exchanged for a power cable meeting your local standard. The power cable must meet the standard for ser-vice in grounded power supply systems.

(VDE 0805, EN 60950, IEC 950, UL 1950, CSA 22.2 No. 950)

In the USA and Canada, a UL or CSA approved power cable should be used.

External interfaces

COM1 (V.24)

Printer (IrDA)

Monitor (VGA)

Keyboard

PCMCIA slot

9-pin Sub-D connector

Internal COM2

15-pin Sub-HD socket

6-pin PS/2 socket

For PCMCIA cards1 x type III or 2 x type II

Inline current fusing 12 A, 600 V AC, 600 V DC,type KLKD, UL listed

Page 209: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Technical Data

Operating Manual VAS 505113-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

13.2.2.1 Multimeter

+

Maximum voltage of the U/R/D measuring lead: DC 60 V.

Common-mode voltage Max 40 V U/R/D

Common-mode suppressionin integrating measurement

50 to 60 Hz Σεχτιον 60 dB

Direct voltage at U/R/D(Ri Σεχτιον 4 MΣεχτιον )

Range Resolution Tolerance

-2 to +2 V 0.001 V ±0.5 % of m.±2 mV

-20 to +20 V 0.01 V ±0.5 % of m.±20 mV

-50 to +50 V 0.02 V ±0.5 % of m.±50 mV

Alternating voltage at U/R/D(effective value,50 Hz to 5 kHz,crest factor min. 3,Ri Σεχτιον 4 MΣεχτιον )

Range Resolution Tolerance

0 to 2 V 0.001 V ±1.5 % of m.±4 mV

0 to 20 V 0.01 V ±1.5 % of m.±40 mV

0 to 40 VS 0.02 V ±1.5 % of m.±80 mV

Alternating voltage at U/R/D(effective value,5 to 10 kHz,Crest factor min. 3,Ri Σεχτιον 4 MΣεχτιον )

Range Resolution Tolerance

0 to 2 V 0.001 V ±5 % of m.±4 mV

0 to 20 V 0.01 V ±5 % of m.±40 mV

0 to 40 VS 0.02 V ±5 % of m.±80 mV

Direct voltage at DSO1(Ri Σεχτιον 4 MΣεχτιον )

Range Resolution Tolerance

-1.6 to +1.6 V 0.001 V ±1 % of m.±4 mV

-4 to +4 V 0.002 V ±1 % of m.±4 mV

-16 to +16 V 0.01 V ±1 % of m.±20 mV

-40 to +40 V 0.02 V ±1 % of m.±40 mV

-160 to +160 V 0.1 V ±1 % of m.±200 mV

-400 to +400 V 0.2 V ±1 % of m.±400 mV

Page 210: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505113-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Technical Data

Alternating voltage at DSO1(effective value,50 Hz to 5 kHz,crest factor min. 2,Ri Σεχτιον 4 MΣεχτιον )

Range Resolution Tolerance

0 to 1.6 V 0.001 V ±1.5 % of m.±4 mV

0 to 4 V 0.002 V ±1.5 % of m.±8 mV

0 to 16 V 0.01 V ±1.5 % of m.±40 mV

0 to 40 V 0.02 V ±1.5 % of m.±80 mV

0 to 160 V 0.1 V ±1.5 % of m.±400 mV

0 to 400 VS 0.2 V ±1.5 % of m.±800 mV

Alternating voltage at DSO1(effective value,5 to 10 kHz,crest factor min. 2,Ri Σεχτιον 4 MΣεχτιον )

Range Resolution Tolerance

0 to 1.6 V 0.001 V ±2.5 % of m.±4 mV

0 to 4 V 0.002 V ±2.5 % of m.±8 mV

0 to 16 V 0.01 V ±2.5 % of m.±40 mV

0 to 40 V 0.02 V ±2.5 % of m.±80 mV

0 to 160 V 0.1 V ±2.5 % of m.±400 mV

0 to 400 VS 0.2 V ±2.5 % of m.±800 mV

Direct current inline(Ri Σεχτιον 250 mΣεχτιον )via U/R/D cableat 10 A socket

Range Resolution Tolerance

-1 to +1 A 0.001 A ±1 % of m.±5 mA

-10 to 10 A 0.01 A ±1 % of m.±50 mA

Alternating Current inlineEffective value, 0 to 500 Hz,crest factor min. 3,Ri Σεχτιον 250 MΣεχτιον )via U/R/D cable at 10 A socket

Range Resolution Tolerance

0 to 1 A 0.001 A ±2 % of m.±5 mA

0 to 10 AS 0.01 A ±2 % of m.±50 mA

Direct currentvia current pick-up 50 A

Range Resolution Tolerance

-5 to +5 A 1 mA ±3 % of m.±10 mA1)

-50 to +50 A 10 mA ±3 % of m.±100 mA1)

1) The accuracy of the current pick-up is given only after calibration.

Alternating currentvia current pick-up 50 A(effective value, 0 to 1 kHz,crest factor min. 3)

Range Resolution Tolerance

0 to 5 A 5 mA ±3.5 % of m.±10 mA1)

0 to 50 AS 50 mA ±3.5 % of m.±100 mA1)

1) The accuracy of the current pick-up is given only after calibration.

Page 211: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Technical Data

Operating Manual VAS 505113-5C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

13.2.2.2 Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO)

Direct currentvia current pick-up 500 A

Range Resolution Tolerance

-500 to +500 A 100 mA Σεχτιον 3 % of m.

Σεχτιον 1 A1)

1) The accuracy of the current pick-up is given only after calibration.

Alternating currentvia current pick-up 500 A(effective value, 0 to 1 kHz,crest factor min. 3)

Range Resolution Tolerance

0 to 500 AS 100 mA Σεχτιον 4 % of m.

Σεχτιον 1 A1)

1) The accuracy of the current pick-up is given only after calibration.

Resistancevia U/R/D lead

The measured current depends on the measure-ment range and is maximum 13 mA.

Range Resolution Tolerance2)

0 Σεχτιον to 10 Σεχτιον 10 mΣεχτιον ±1 % of m.

±10 mΣεχτιον 0 Σεχτιον to 100 Σεχτιον 0.1 Σεχτιον ±1 % of m.

±100 mΣεχτιον 0 Σεχτιον to 1 kΣεχτιον 1 Σεχτιον ±1 % of m.

±1 Σεχτιον 0 Σεχτιον to 10 kΣεχτιον 10 Σεχτιον ±1 % of m.

±10 Σεχτιον 0 Σεχτιον to 100 kΣεχτιον 100 Σεχτιον ±1.5 % of m.

±100 Σεχτιον 0 Σεχτιον to 1 MΣεχτιον 1 kΣεχτιον ±2 % of m.

±1 kΣεχτιον 0 Σεχτιον to 10 MΣεχτιον 10 kΣεχτιον ±2 % of m.

±10 kΣεχτιον An acoustic signal is heard at a test object resi-stance of Σεχτιον 2 Σεχτιον in continuity mea-surements in the range 10 Σεχτιον .2) Accuracy in measurement range 10 Σεχτιον and 100 Σεχτιον is given only after zero balancing.

Diode test via U/R/D lead

Measurement current 1 mAMeasurement voltage max. 5 V

The current flow direction is indicated by a diode symbol. During the measurement the polarity of the measurement current is reversed.

Required measuring leads DSO1/DSO2 measuring leads

kV pick-up

Trigger pick-up

Page 212: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505113-6 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Technical Data

Measuring channels CH1, CH2 Sampling rate Max. 5 MHzin channel 1 mode

Sampled-data Depth 16 k (meas.vals.)/storage channel

Coupling AC, DC, GND

Measuring channels 2

Measurement inputs DSO1, DSO2,kV pick-up

Time base

Time base Sampling rate

2? 5 MHz3)

2? 2.5 MHz 2? 1 MHz 2? 500 kHz 2? 250 kHz 2? 100 kHz1 ms/DIV 50 kHz2 ms/DIV 25 kHz5 ms/DIV 10 kHz10 ms/DIV 5 kHz20 ms/DIV 2.5 kHz50 ms/DIV 1 kHz100 ms/DIV500 Hz200 ms/DIV250 Hz500 ms/DIV100 Hz1 s/DIV 50 Hz2 s/DIV 25 Hz5 s/DIV 10 Hz10 s/DIV 5 Hz20 s/DIV 2.5 Hz4)

50 s/DIV 1 Hz4)

100 s/DIV 0.5 Hz4)

3) In channel 1 mode4) Only in Draw mode

Measurement inputsDSO1, DSO2, KV

Make sure that both measurement connections are adapted on each cable.

Bandwidth 100 kHz(±3 dB)

Resolution 10 Bit

Accuracy DC to 10 kHz±1 %;100 kHz -3 dB

Common-mode suppression to 100 kHz= 40 dB

Common-mode voltagemax. 40 V

Measurement range selection Manual or automatic in Auto Setup

Page 213: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Technical Data

Operating Manual VAS 505113-7C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Measurement ranges DSO1, DSO2

Differential inputs Voltage divider= 4 MΣεχτιον , 25

pFagainst protectiveconductor potential

Range y deflection

±1.6 V 200 mV/DIV

±4 V 500 mV/DIV

±16 V 2 V/DIV

±40 V 5 V/DIV

±160 V 20 V/DIV

±400 V 50 V/DIV

Measurement range kV Range y deflection Tolerance

±8 kV 1 kV/DIV ±15 % of m.±200 V

±20 kV 2.5 kV/DIV ±15 % of m.±400 V

±40 kV 5 kV/DIV ±15 % of m.±800 V

The size of the measurement error depends on the ignition cable insulation and applies to use in vehicle systems with mechanical distributors. The kV input and the kV pick-up (ignition voltage adapter) form a capacitive voltage divi-der. The tester can be adapted to a stationary ignition distributor system by external connec-tion of the ignition voltage adapter.

Trigger pick-up input To record ignition timing on high-voltage cables (secondary ignition coil)

Trigger functions Trigger channel DSO1, DSO2,Trigger pick-up orkV pick-up

Trigger coupling AC, DC, HF, LF

Trigger edge Positive, negative

Trigger level Automatic oradjustable in 1 % measurement range increments

Trigger delay Pre-trigger and post-trigger, adjustable in 10 % deflection increments

Trigger mode Single, Normal,Auto, Auto Level,Auto Setup,Draw mode

Page 214: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505113-8 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Technical Data

13.2.2.3 Expansion Inputs

13.3 Measuring Leads

13.4 Workshop Trolley

Temperature measurement input The measurement input is prepared for connec-tion of a temperature sensor with a Pt 100 measuring element.

Pressure measurement input The measurement input is prepared for connec-tion of a pressure sensor with a 4 mA to 20 mA interface.

Cable bend diameter 14 x cable diameter

Mating cycles > 1,000

Dimensions (W x D x H) 735 x 760 x 1.340 mm

Weight 49 kg

Ambient conditions

Operation Ambient temperature 0 to +55 °CRelative humidity 10 to 90 %,

non-condensing

Electrical connections

Power supply

Tester supply

Printer supply

Non-heating appliance socket, interchangeable IEC/CEE22 power cable

Fixed cable with non-heating appliance inter-face CEE22

Fixed cable with non-heating appliance inter-face CEE22

Wheels 4, 2 of which braked

Page 215: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Technical Data

Operating Manual VAS 505113-9C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

13.5 Printer

Type

Display panel

OKI OL610ex/OKIPAGE10ex

LCD display with 2 lines of 8 characters each

Dimensions (W x D x H)

OL6..ex/OKIPAGE10ex 320 x 360 x 160 mm/330 x 377 x 200 mm

Weight

OL6..ex/OKIPAGE10ex 7,7 kg/10 kg

Ambient conditions

Operation

Storage (packed)

Ambient temperature 10 to 32 °CRelative humidity 20 to 80 %

Ambient temperature -10 to 43 °C Relative humidity 10 to 90 %,

non-condensing

Electrical connected loads 230 Volt version

Voltage

Power consumptionOL6..ex/OKIPAGE10ex

AC 230/240 V (+6 %/-14 %),50 Hz, 60 Hz (±2 %)

Operation approx. 100 W/200 W

Max power consump. approx. 400 W/460 W(in the heat-up phase)

Electrical connected loads120 Volt version

Voltage

Power consumptionOL6..ex/OKIPAGE10ex

AC 120 V (+5,5 %/-15 %),50 Hz, 60 Hz (±2 %)

Operation approx. 160 W

Max power consump. approx. 420 W(in the heat-up phase)

Interfaces

Power connection

Data

EmulationOL6..ex/OKIPAGE10ex

3-pin appliance plug

Bidirectional Centronics

HP LaserJet 4 (PCL 5e)/HP LaserJet 5 (PCL 6), EPSON FX 850, IBM Proprinter XL

Reliability/useful lives

Device useful life

Toner cartridge useful life

Drum unit useful life

180,000 pages or 5 years

Up to 2,000 pages with approx. 5% density

With 5% density:up to 16,000 pages at 3 pages per print job

Page 216: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505113-10 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Technical Data

Appendices to the Chapter: "Connector Use, Diagnostic Cableand Diagnostic Adapter"

Print output

SpeedOL6..ex/OKIPAGE10ex

Warm-up timeOL6..ex/OKIPAGE10ex

Resolution

6/10 pages per minute in copy mode

60/80 seconds (at room temperature of 25°C) First page prints after an average of 17/14 seconds

600 x 600 points per inch

Paper feed

OL6..ex/OKIPAGE10ex Cassette capacity 100/250 x 75 g/m2 sheets

Paper output

OL6..ex/OKIPAGE10ex Tray capacity of 100/150 x 75 g/m2 sheets

Specified paper quality

Individual sheets

WeightOL6..ex/OKIPAGE10ex

A4, Letter

60 to 90/105 g/m2 with automatic feed60 to 120 g/m2 with manual feed

Memory 2 MB RAM

Safety standard

OL6..OL6..ex

OKIPAGE10ex

VDE 0871 Class B, EN 60950, VDE 0805, BS 7002

VDE 0871 Class B, VDE 0805, BS 7002, CE

Page 217: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendix to the Chapter "Technical Data"

2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO9$6

&$;

Connector Use, Diagnostic Cables and Diagnostic Adapter

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Pin

3 m Diagnostic Cable VAS 5051/1

4

7151

16

Vehicle connectionVAS 5051 connection

17

71018

12 Kl. 31

K-wire

Kl.15

Kl. 308

13

16

FK-L

14

13

9

1 signal ground5

11

R011 kΩ

R021 kΩ

4

7151

16

Vehicle connectionVAS 5051 connection

71018

Kl. 31

K-wireL-wireKl.15

Kl. 30

13 FK-L

9

1 signal ground5

11

R011 kΩ

R021 kΩ

5 m Diagnostic Cable VAS 5051/3

View on plug-in side

12

3

4

56 7

8

9

10

1112

14

1516

17

18

Socket13

View on plug-in side

L-wire

Page 218: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO9$6

&$;

Appendix to the Chapter "Technical Data"

4

7151

16

Vehicle connectionVAS 5051 connection

12

146

102

Kl. 31

K-wireL-wireKl.15

Kl. 30

CAN screen

CAN (-)CAN (+)SAE J1850(-)SAE J1850(+)

13 FK-Lsignal ground5

17

71018

12

8

16

14

13

9

1

11

4

6

53

2

R011 kΩR021 kΩ

3 m combo diagnostic cable VAS 5051/5

5 m combo Diagnostic cable VAS 5051/6

4

7151

16

Vehicle connectionVAS 5051 connection

102

Kl. 31

K-wireL-wireKl.15

Kl. 30

SAE J1850(-)SAE J1850(+)

13 FK-Lsignal ground5

71018

9

1

11

3

2

R011 kΩR021 kΩ

Page 219: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendix to the Chapter "Technical Data"

2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO9$6

&$;

Diagnostic adapter VAS 5051/2

1647

15

21

21

pin

Kl. 30 Kl. 31

K-wireL-wire

12345678

910111213141516

Socket

View on plug-in side

black

white

21

black

21 pin

white

View on plug-in side

Vehicle connection

Diagnostic cable connection

Page 220: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO9$6

&$;

Appendix to the Chapter "Technical Data"

Page 221: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Forms and Addresses

Operating Manual VAS 505114-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

14 Forms and Addresses

14.1 Forms for Registration and Fault Reporting

The appendix to this chapter contains the "Registration" and "Fault Report" forms.

Use copies of these forms. Keep the sheets that you fax to Customer Service in this operating manual, for example immediately following the appendix to this chapter.

Page 222: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505114-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Forms and Addresses

14.2 Service Addresses

This address list is maintained on a continuous basis and will be updated in later versions. If there is no office listed for your country, please contact the SIEMENS office in Germany.

14.2.1 Assignment of countries to regional support centres

Supported country Service address

Abu Dhabi

Algeria France

Andorra Spain

Argentina

Australia Singapore

Austria Germany

Bahama Islands USA

Bahrain

Belgium Belgium

Bolivia

Bosnia-Herzegovina

Brazil

Brunei Singapore

Bulgaria

Cambodia Singapore

Canada USA

Canary Islands Spain

Ceuta Spain

Chile

China

Columbia

Costa Rica

Croatia Croatia

Curacao

Cyprus

Czech Republic

Denmark Denmark

Dom. Republic

Dubai

Dutch. Antillas

Ecuador

Egypt

El Salvador

Estonia Germany

Ethiopia

Finland Sweden

France France

French Guyana France

Gabon

Georgia Germany

Germany Germany

Ghana

Great Britain Great Britain

Greece

Guadeloupe France

Guam Singapore

Guatemala

Haiti

Honduras

Hong Kong

Hungary

Iceland Great Britain

India Singapore

Indonesia Singapore

Iran

Ireland Ireland

Israel Germany

Italy Italy

Ivory Coast France

Jamaica

Japan

Jordan

Kazakhstan

Supported country Service address

Page 223: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505114-3 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Forms and Addresses

Kenya

Kuwait

Latvia Germany

Lebanon

Liberia

Libya Germany

Lithuania

Luxembourg Luxembourg

Macedonia

Madagascar

Malawi

Malaysia Singapore

Malta Italy

Martinique France

Mauritius

Mellila Spain

Mexico

Morocco France

Netherlands Netherlands

New Caledonia Singapore

New Zealand Singapore

Nigeria

Norway Sweden

Oman

Pakistan

Panama

Paraguay

Peru

Philippines Singapore

Poland Poland

Portugal Spain

Puerto Rico

Qatar

Réunion France

Romania

Russia

Saudi Arabia

Sharjah

Sierra Leone

Singapore Singapore

Slovakia

Supported country Service address

Slovenia

South Africa

South Korea

Spain Spain

Sri Lanka Singapore

Sudan

Sweden Sweden

Switzerland Switzerland

Syria

Tahiti Singapore

Taiwan Singapore

Thailand Singapore

Tobago

Togo

Trinidad

Tunisia France

Turkey

Ukraine

United Arab Emirates

Uruguay

USA USA

Uzbekhistan Germany

Venezuela

Vietnam Singapore

White Russia

Yemen

Yugoslavia

Zaire

Zambia

Zimbabwe

Supported country Service address

Page 224: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505114-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Forms and Addresses

14.2.2 Regional support centres

Responsible SIEMENS

office

Location FAX hotline for fault reports Telephone advice on use of the VAS 5051

Belgium S.A. D´leteren n.v.V.A.G Importeur

Leuvensesteenweg 639B-3071 Kortenberg

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)02-756-8440 (national)+32-2-756-8440 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

02-756-8454 (national)+32-2-756-8454 (international)

Croatia Auto Centar Zubak

Zagrebacka b.b.10410 Velica Gorica

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)01-622-4052 (national)+ 385-1-622-4052 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

01-6269-026 (national)+ 385-1-6269-026 (international)

Denmark Skandinavisk Motor

Park Alle 3552605 Broendby

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)4-363-1518 (national)+45-4-363-1518 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

4-328-8200 (national)+45-4-328-8200 (international)

France Siemens SPAA&D PA CSC

Chemin de Sandlach F-67506 Haguenau

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)0388-90-6688 (national)+33-388-90-6688 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

0388-90-6677 (national)+33-388-90-6677 (international)

Germany Siemens AGA&D PA2 FT CS

Siemensallee 84D-76187 Karlsruhe

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)0721-595-5252 (national)+49-721-595-5252 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

0721-595-4308 (national)+49-721-595-4308 (international)

Great Britain

SRS Automation Ltd

Unit 7 Daneside B. P.Riverdane RoadCongletonCheshireCW12 1UN

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)01260-281831 (national)+44-1260-281831 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

01260-280809 (national)+44-1260-280809 (international)

Ireland Motor Distributors Ltd.

Naas Road IRL-Dublin 12

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)01-4094431 (national)+351-1-4094431 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

01-4094372 (national)+351-1-4094372 (international)

Italy Siemens S.p.A

Via Vipineto, 4I-20128 Milano

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)02-6676-2750 (national)+39-2-6676-2750 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

02-6676-2731 (national)+39-2-6676-2731 (international)

Page 225: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505114-5 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Forms and Addresses

Luxembourg Autodiffusion M. Losch

S.e.c.s.Zone IndustrielleL-1818 Luxembourg - Howald

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)02-495134 (national)+35-2-495134 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

02-403333 (national)+35-2-403333 (international)

Netherlands Siemens Nederland N.V.Bedrijvencentrum, PI Service EA

Werner von Siemensstraat 1NL-2712 PN Zoetermeer

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)070-333-3334 (national)+31-70-333-3334 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

070-333-3050 (national)+31-70-333-3050 (international)

Poland Kulczyk TradexV.A.G Importeur

ul. Dziadoszanska 10PL-61-248 Poznan

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)061-878-3802 (national)+48-61-878-3802 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

061-878-3819 (national)+48-61-878-3819 (international)

Singapore Siemens (Pte.) Ltd.Technical Services Dept.

2 Kallang sector #6-00SPG-349277 Singapore

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)0740-7196 (national)+65-740-7196 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

0740-7202 (national)+65-740-7202 (international)

Spain Siemens S.A.División I-ST

Albarracin 34E-8037 Madrid

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)91-304-9217 (national)+34-91-304-9217 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

91-514-8353 (national)+34-91-514-8353 (international)

Sweden Siemens ABServiceavdelningen

Johanneslundsvägen 2 - 4S-19487 Upplands Väsby

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)08-728-1703 (national)+46-8-728-1703 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

08-728-1272 (national)+46-8-728-1272 (international)

Switzerland AMAGZentralersatzteillager

Bahnhofstrasse 30CH-8107 Buchs/ZH

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)056-463-9498 (national)+41-56-463-9498 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

056-463-9191 (national)+41-56-463-9191 (international)

USA Siemens Energy & Automation Inc.Field Service

390 Kent AvenueElk Grove Village (Illinois)IL 60007

Fault reportby FAX to:(fax form in the appendix to this chap-ter)847-640-0227 (national)+1-847-640-0227 (international)

Telephone adviceOn use of the VAS 5051

800-215-1646 (national)+1-800-215-1646 (international)

Responsible SIEMENS

office

Location FAX hotline for fault reports Telephone advice on use of the VAS 5051

Page 226: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505114-6 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Forms and Addresses

14.3 OKI Addresses

The OKI corporation has offices in the following countries. You can contact one of them if you do not have an OKI representative in your area.

.

While your VAS 5051 is under warranty, you should also contact the SIEMENS services center if you have printing problems. The exception to this rule would be the acquisition of consumables such as toner and the drum unit. The quickest and easiest way to get these materials is through your local OKI representative.

Country Address Communication

Czech Republic

OKI Europe Ltd.Branch Office IBC, Pobrezni 3 186 00Praha 8

Tel.: 2 32 66 41, ~ 42Fax: 2 32 66 21

Denmark OKI Systems a. s.Parkalle 382 2625 Vallensbaek

Tel.: 43 66 65 00Fax: 43 66 65 90

France OKI Systèmes S.A.40-50, Av. Général de Gaulle 94240 L´Haÿ les Roses

Tel.: 46.15.80.00Fax: 41.24.00.40

Germany OKI Systems GmbHHansaallee 187 40549 Düsseldorf

Tel.: 211 52 66 - 0Fax: 211 59 33 45BBS: 211 52 66-222 300-28800 bps, 8, N, 1Datex-J/Btx: *222333#

Great Britain

OKI Europe Ltd.Central House Balfour Road, Hounslow Middlesex TW3 1HYOKI Systems Ltd.3 Castlecary Road Cumbernauld G68 0DA

Tel.: 0 181 - 219 21 90Fax: 0 181 - 219 21 99

Tel.: 0 1236 - 50 25 02Fax: 0 1236 - 50 27 95

Hungary OKI Europe Ltd.Europa Center Karoly (Tanacs)KRT 11 5A1075 Budapest

Tel.: (36 - 1) 2 69 - 78 71, ~ 73Fax: (36 - 1) 2 69 - 78 72

Ireland OKI Systems Ltd.The Square Industrial Complex Tal-laght, Dublin 24

Tel.: 1 459 - 86 66Fax: 1 459 - 88 40

Italy OKI Systems S. p. A.Centro Commerciale "Il Girasole" Palazzo Cellini - Lotto 3.05/B 20084 Lacchiarella (Milano)

Tel.: 2 90 - 07 64 10Fax: 2 90 - 07 549

Page 227: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Forms and Addresses

Operating Manual VAS 505114-7C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Netherlands OKI Systems b.v.Kruisweg 765 Postbus 690, 2132 NG (2130 AR) Hoofddorp

Tel.: 0 20 - 65 31 531Fax: 0 20 - 65 31 301

Norway OKI Systems A/SHvamsvingen 9 PO Box 174 2013 Skjetten

Tel.: 0 638 - 93 600Fax: 0 638 - 93 601

Poland OKI Europe Ltd.Branch Office UL Grzybowska 80-82 00840 Warsaw

Tel.: (2) 66 15 40 7Fax: (2) 66 15 45 1

Singapore OKI Electronics Pte Ltd.78 Shenton Way #09-01 Singapore 0207

Tel.: 2 21 - 37 22Fax: 2 21 - 92 82

Spain OKI SystemsC/Goya 9 Madrid 28001

Tel.: 5 77 73 36Fax: 5 76 24 20

Sweden OKI Systems ABStormbyvägen 2-4 PO Box 131, 163 55 Spånga

Tel.: 08 - 7 95 58 80Fax: 08 - 7 95 65 27

Country Address Communication

Page 228: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505114-8 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Forms and Addresses

14.4 KNÜRR Addresses

Country Address Communication

Australia Ricon Pty Ltd.Unit 1, 32 Lilian Fowler PlaceMarrickville NSW 2204

Tel.: (02) 95 19 - 48 77Fax: (02) 95 19 - 46 96

Austria Grothusen Ges. m. b. H.Albert-Schweitzer-Gasse 51140 Wien

Tel.: (1) - 9 70 22 - 0Fax: (1) - 9 70 22 - 9

Belgium Knürr NVDe Robianostraat 1182150 Borsbeek

Tel.: 03 - 3.66.47.00Fax: 03 - 3.66.41.01

Brazil Ellan Eletromecânica Ltda.Rua Joao Marcon, 16518550 Boituva - Sao Paulo

Tel.: (0152) 63 - 24 44Fax: (0152) 63 - 10 24

Brunei Amadeus Aerospace Serv. Pte. LtdPO Box 1604Bandar seri Begewan 1916Brunei Darussalam

Tel.: + 637 - 9 - 83 10 20Fax: + 637 - 2 - 65 55 37

Czech Republic

AutoCont A. S.!AB70200 Ostrava 2

Tel.: 0 69 - 6 15 23 92Fax: 0 69 - 6 11 35 62

Denmark Aksel Skaarup & Co. A/SVasekaer 6-82730 Herlev

Tel.: 44 85 04 85Fax: 44 94 99 89

Finland Perel OyTorpankatu 2805801 Hyvinkää

Tel.: 919 - 87 11 1Fax: 919 - 87 11 500

France Knürr s. a. r. l.ZAC Les Petits Carreaux4, Avenue des Violettes94384 Bonneuil-sur-Marne

Tel.: (01) 43 77 85 85Fax: (01) 43 39 02 10

Germany Knürr-Interplast GmbHAm Waldeck 1D-88367 Hohentengen

Tel.: + 49 (0) 75 72/76 00 0Fax: + 49 (0) 75 72/76 00-30

Great Britain

Knürr (UK) Ltd.Burrel Road,St. Ives, Cambs, PE17 4LE

Tel.: 0 1480 - 49 61 25Fax: 0 1480 - 49 63 73

Hungary Kontaset Kft.Helsinki ut. 531201 Budapest XX.

Tel.: (36 - 1) 2 83 - 03 78Fax: (36 - 1) 2 83 - 01 12

India Kirloskar Electrodyne Ltd.117, S. BlockM. I. D. C. BhosariPune 411026

Tel.: 2 12 79 01 21 - 24Fax: 2 12 79 03 16

Israel Alexander Schneider Ltd.16 Heim Hazaz StreetTel Aviv 69 497

Tel.: 03 - 647 - 33 31Fax: 03 - 647 - 41 14

Italy Forind AvioElettronica SpAVia Copernico, 620060 Cassina de'Pecchi

Tel.: (02) 95 34 30 80Fax: (02) 95 34 31 04

Page 229: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Forms and Addresses

Operating Manual VAS 505114-9C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Appendix to the Chapter: "Registration Certificate for VAS 5051", "Fault Report Fax for VAS 5051"

Japan CEC, Chuo Electronics Co., Ltd.Daiichi Seimei bldg., 7 Fl.3-20-6, Myojin-choHachioji-shi, 192 Tokyo

Tel.: 04 26 - 58 - 58 11Fax: 04 26 - 58 - 58 08

Malta Baron Technical Services Ltd.Everton HouseTriq It-TorbaAttard

Tel.: 41 82 56Fax: 41 82 53

Netherlands Knürr Nederland BVNikkelstraat 34823 A. E. Breda

Tel.: 0 76 - 54 22 92 2Fax: 0 76 - 54 21 01 5

Norway Knürr Norge ASGjerdums vei 160881 Oslo

Tel.: 22 23 03 40Fax: 22 23 65 40

Portugal Sociedade Zickermann S. A.Rossio, 3, Apartado 21151103 Lisboa Codex

Tel.: 01 - 3 46 90 65Fax: 01 - 3 46 91 29

Singapore Petracarbon Pte Ltd.1001 Redhill Industrial Estate#04-01/06 Jalan Bukit MerahSingapore 0315

Tel.: 2 71 - 08 00Fax: 2 73 - 31 21

South Korea MULTITEK294-2, Dang Jung DongKun Po city, Kyung Ki Do#435-030

Tel.: (0343) 58 08 16Fax: (0343) 58 08 17

Spain S. I. G., S. A. Polig. Ind. JumapiSuecia, 828812 Alcalá de Henares (Madrid)

Tel.: 91 - 8 89 89 61Fax: 91 - 8 89 84 92

Sweden Knürr Sverige ABFinlandsgatan 16 - 1816474 Kista

Tel.: 08 - 7 03 99 00Fax: 08 - 7 03 99 35

Switzerland Knürr AGBruggacherstraße 168117 Fällanden

Tel.: 01 - 8 06 54 54Fax: 01 - 8 06 54 64

United Arab Emirates

Computer Network SystemsP.O. Box 46144Abu Dhabi, U. A. E.

Tel.: 02 - 722 888Fax: 02 - 724 151

USA Knürr USA Inc.1890 North Voyager AvenueSimi Valley, CA 93063Knürr USA East120 Northpoint CourtBlythewood, SC 29016

Tel.: (8 05) 5 26 - 77 33Fax: (8 05) 5 84 - 83 71

Tel.: (8 03) 7 86 - 26 66Fax: (8 03) 7 86 - 24 44

Country Address Communication

Page 230: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505114-10 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Forms and Addresses

Page 231: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Registration certificate for VAS 5051

Please complete and return immediately to Siemens Service.

Fax No.: in Germany (international prefix)

Dear customer,

You have received the VAS 5051 Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System with system number shown here.

Field for DOC label

To safeguard future support from Siemens Service, we ask that you answer the questions below.

We need this data in order to provide optimal service for expansions, new versions and repairs, and for handling of warranty claims.

We thank you in advance for your cooperation and hope you enjoy much success with your new test system

Please type or write in capital letters using a black pen.

What is your postal address? What is your delivery address?Importer/VZ number ________________________________________ (if different to postal address)Dealership number__________________________________________

Company name _____________________________________________ ________________________ _______Street address _________ No_____________________ ______________________ No __________

City, Zip______________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________Country ______________________________________________________ ________________________________Sales ID no. _________________________________________________

Tel. no._______________________________________________________ ________________________________Fax no. ______________________________________________________ ________________________________

When did you receive your tester?

Date____________________________

Who is your system administrator/liaison for our Service department?

Mr./Mrs.________________________Tel. no.___________________Fax no._______________

Place_____________________________Date___________________

Customer’s signature _________________________________________Stamp

Page 232: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

xxx

Page 233: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Fault Report Fax for VAS 5051

Please complete in full and fax to the Siemens hotline.

Fax no.: _____________________________

System no.:DOC_____________

(from operating manual VAS 5051 section 14.2) (on the right side of the workshop trolley)

What is your postal address? What is your delivery address?Importer/VZ number ________________________________________ (if different to postal address)Dealership number__________________________________________

Company name _____________________________________________ ________________________ _______Street address _________________ _____ No_________________ ______________________ No __________

City, Zip______________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________Country ______________________________________________________ ________________________________Tel. no._______________________________________________________ ________________________________Fax no. ______________________________________________________ ________________________________

Who is the contact in your company dealing with this fault?Mr./Mrs.________________________Tel. no.___________________Fax no.__________________

Do you still have warranty cover? yes

Problems with the tester (see sections 11.2, 11.3 of the operating manual)Did the fault occur during tester startup before the start mask appeared? yesDid the fault occur during normal operation? yesTest instrument unit self-test error? yesDiagnostic bus unit self-test error? yes

Error message:____________________________

Problems with the measuring leads(see section 11.3.3 of the operating manual)During which test did faults occur?

U/R/D/COM measuring lead Trigger pick-up

DSO measuring lead kV pick-up

Current pick-up 50 A Diagnostic cable

Current pick-up 500 A Diagnostic adapter

Problems with the printer/IrDA adapter (see section 11.3.4 in the operating manual)During which test did faults occur?

Infrared transmission (IrDA adapter)?

Printer?

Fault characteristics:_________________________________

Can the fault be reproduced? yesDoes the fault only occur sporadically? yes

More detailed fault description on supplement sheet

Page 234: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

xxx

Page 235: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Supplement Sheet to Fault Report Fax for VAS 5051

In which software version did the fault occur?(retrieve data from the start mask information window)___________________________

Which language version is installed on your tester?_________________________________

In which operating mode did the fault occur?

Vehicle self-diagnosis?

Test instrument?

Guided fault finding?

Applications?

Administration?Fault message text/no _________________________________________________

_________________________________________________ _________________________________________________

Fault description in guided fault findingIn which vehicle identification did the fault occur?(retrieve data from the right-side information window)

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

During which function test and in which test step did the fault occur?(retrieve data from the left-side information window/work window)

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

What actions led to the fault?______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

What do you need in your view to solve the problem?

Tester?

Printer?

Cable/lead?

Other material?

Required material according to parts list(see appendix to chapter 11 of the operating manual)

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Location _____________________________Date___________________

Customer’s signature _________________________________________Stamp

Page 236: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

,,,

xxx

Page 237: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Terms

Operating Manual VAS 505115-1C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

15 Terms

Table 15-1 Terms and Explanations

Terms Explanation

Adaption values Values stored in the control unit, which can be adapted to the vehicle in a fixed range.

Alphanumeric key-board

Keyboard by which numbers and text can be entered.

Amplitude The maximum value that the amount of deviation of an oscillation, e.g. a voltage, an alter-nating current, can reach.

Basic setting To permit settings to be made, the controls in the control unit are shut off and set to a basic value.

Buffered The power supply to the tester is buffered; that is, if the power fails or the tester is moved with its power cable disconnected, the installed accumulator provides the power supply for a limited time.

Calibration Determining the deviation of a test device (e.g.: current pick-up).

CD-ROM Compact Disk - Read Only Memory: A storage medium that looks like a music CD that can be read only; it cannot be written to.

Channel number Number of a measured value channel in the control unit.

COM: "Common"; corresponds to "Ground" or "0 V"; measurement device input

Control unit Electronic device to control and monitor vehicle functions. Vehicle system

Data block Display group.

Degree of suspicion The order in which diagnostic objects are suspected of having faults.

Deselection, deselec-ting

Canceling a selection of program functions or list entries. Selection.

Diagnosis The entire process of assigning fault characteristics to possible faulty functions, com-ponent groups or components until a faulty component is localized. Can be determined by retrieving expert knowledge from the knowledge base or from the user’s direct expert knowledge. The result of the process is also sometimes termed "diagnosis".

Diagnosis object Umbrella term for functions, component groups or components to which the diagnostic function is applied.

Diagnostic cable Connection cable between the vehicle and tester.

Diagnostic connec-tion

Connection socket for the diagnostic lead on the tester or vehicle

Diagnostic strategy Process of guided fault finding based on the available information about a fault such as1. fault codes read from vehicle systems,2.complaint reports (terms selected by the user from masks to describe symptoms or fault characteristics) or3. terms describing functions and components of the vehicle selected by the user from masks as possible fault sources; own test plan.The three entries, either individually or combined, lead to a calculated test proposal in the test plan. The strategies (1.) and (2.) are designated as system-guided fault finding, while (3.) is designated as user-guided fault finding.

Page 238: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505115-2 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Terms

Dialog box On-screen information box showing messages and expecting entries from the user.

Direct current measu-rement (inline current measurement)

Current measurement in which the tester is used as an ammeter directly in the circuit. Opposite: Inductive current measurement via a current pick-up clamped on the cable.

Display group A fixed group of data that can be read from the vehicle system.

Document Documents in the tester containing information (images, text) that can be used as needed by the user.

DSO Digital Storage Oscilloscope

Fault characteristics The entire effects (fault symptoms) of a fault scenario in vehicle functions, component groups or components.

Fault memory Data memory of the control unit in which all detected faults are stored.

Fault symptom A describable effect of a fault symptom in the vehicle functions, component groups or components. The symptoms make up the fault characteristics. Known symptoms assi-gned to suspect diagnostic objects are stored in the database of the tester. Diagnosis.

Floating No connection to the power supply or to the grounding.

Function Every action that the tester can take in the various operating modes. Individual functions usually are selected from a list displayed on-screen.

Function test A test program with which functions, component groups or components can be checked as to whether they meet requirements. The function test also can be used for a repair check.

Guided fault finding This covers the diagnostic process in an optimized procedure including vehicle identifica-tion, vehicle system test, test plan and function test.

Initial graphic Switchable image of a vehicle that appears in the start mask.

Inline current measu-rement

Direct current measurement.

IrDA Infrared Data Association.

Job code A unique combination of characters and letters to identify interrupted and saved diagnosis jobs.

Key CD CD on which the expanded functions are stored. It must be inserted in the tester’s drive to access the expanded functions.

Marque separation On devices with marque separation, only CDs for the vehicle marques required in the dealership in question need be installed on the tester. Without installation of at least one marque-specific CD the devices cannot run guided fault finding.

Mask On-screen display with pre-set breakdown into various graphical elements such as win-dows, buttons, scroll bars, etc.

Measurement type In "Test instrument" mode, the measurement type defines whether the measurement is executed with DC voltage or AC voltage. In "Guided Fault Finding" mode the measure-ment type determines whether a current or a voltage is measured in a function test.

Mode, Modes The current operating state of the tester, or its program.

Navigation bar Functions in the lower portion of the mask, e.g. switching from the current mask to another mask in guided fault finding.

Numeric keyboard Keyboard by which only numbers can be entered, no text.

Table 15-1 Terms and Explanations

Page 239: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Terms

Operating Manual VAS 505115-3C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating mode Any basic tester function that can be activated from the start mask: "Vehicle self-dia-gnosis", "Test instrument", "Guided Fault Finding", "Administration" and "Help". Each operating mode is divided into individual functions.

Operating system The software installed in the tester.

Oscilloscope Measurement and display device for electrical signals that displays the time characteristic of the signal strength (e.g. oscillations)

Own test plan Diagnostic strategy based on the selection of descriptions of possible defective functions and components by the user. If faults in the vehicle system are detected during diagnosis or a complaint report is entered, the test plan differentiates between the system test plan and an own test plan.

Permanent fault A continually occurring or continuous fault.

Preselection The suggestion of the tester to call up one of several functions from the current mask. The preselection is shown by a black bar on the screen. You can change it at any time.

Print screen (Hard-copy)

Paper printout of the screen contents ( masks, etc.)

Pull-up menu Selection menu that the tester displays on-screen when certain buttons on the navigation bar are chosen.

Quit Response to a query from the tester, resulting in termination of a function or dialog.

Reversed polarity Mistakenly switching the connection leads for the power supply.

Run-up Tester action between power-up and the first display of the start mask, which includes loading data, a self-test, etc. Tester run-up takes approximately 1.5 minutes, during which time no entries can be made.

Screensaver (standby mode)

Advanced Power Management (APM): If the touchscreen has not been used for ten minu-tes, the tester turns off the display to conserve energy. The operating system continues running. To activate the mask display, touch the top edge of the mask.

Selection bar Visual identifier of a selected line.

Selection, selecting Selecting a program function or a text entry from a list. The selected element is highligh-ted on-screen by a black bar. Deselection.

Self-diagnosis Vehicle systems are capable of making self-diagnoses. They have methods to check their own functions, connected sensors and actuators. A fault leads to an entry in the fault memory of the vehicle system. The tester has all faults in its knowledge base so that it can make a test proposal based on reading the fault memory and allocating a fault code to a fault type and location.

Sensor Device that picks up measured values.

Shutdown delay The time between pressing the on/off button to switch off the computer and the actual shutdown. The shutdown delay is approximately 10 seconds.

Signal tone Beep or whistle emitted by the tester when, for example, the battery voltage reaches a limit in buffer mode.

Sporadic fault An occasional or short-term fault.

Start mask The display on the screen after the tester starts operation. From here, the tester‘s operating modes can be accessed. Identifiable by the initial graphic.

Table 15-1 Terms and Explanations

Page 240: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Operating Manual VAS 505115-4 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Terms

Sub-mask Any of several mask displays that belong to the same function and allow selection of restricting criteria or subfunctions, for example. Sub-masks in the same function are very similar and show the same basic data as set in other sub-masks in their information win-dows.

Test plan In guided fault finding, table listing the diagnosis objects determined by generation of suspicions and by fault finding algorithm.

Touchscreen (touch-sensitive surface)

Mask that has a touch-sensitive surface. The hardware and software reacts when an object such as a finger touches the screen, recognizes the place touched and triggers the associa-ted function (e.g. a button). The touchscreen replaces externally connected input devices such as a keyboard, mouse, etc.

Trigger level Voltage value at which the measurement of a test signal characteristic is started.

Trigger signal The signal used to start the graphing process of a test signal characteristic.

Update New version of the knowledge base imported from CD.

Vehicle system A control unit known by name, including associated sensors, actuators and cabling.

Virtual keyboard The graphical display of a keyboard on the touchscreen. The individual buttons can be used by fingertip control just as with a real keyboard.

Table 15-1 Terms and Explanations

Page 241: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Index

Manuel d’utilisation VAS 505116-1C79298-A3238-X140-04-19

16 Index

&

Accumulator.Adaption.Adaption value.&.&.Administration

CD contents list*.Date/time*.)Enter workshop code / Change

dealership identifier *.&*.

Expanded functions*.Overview*.Print format*.Select function*.Select initial graphic*.Self-test*.'&.'Signal generator*.Start*.Update installation*.'

Air filter.'&.Amplitude (.& (.& (.& .*&.Applications.

Overview).Associated documents.Audio output).Auto level mode(.&(.&(.)Auto mode(.&(.)Auto setup mode(.&(.

:

Basic Setting(.&(.'Basic setting.*&.Buffered.

+

Calibration(.&(.'&(.&(.&.'&.&.)&.&.

Test Instrument(.'Tester.

CANController Area Network .&

.Care and Maintenance

Calibration.

Drum.Fuse.Measuring lead.(Printer.(Printer Settings.Printing Mechanism.Sight Check.Storage battery.&.Tester.Touchscreen.Workshop trolley.(

CD.*&*.&*.'&*.&.&.Contents list*.

Channel number.&.&.Cleaning the Printing Mechanism.COM Measuring lead.Combo diagnostic cable.Complaint report.&.&.&.&.'&.&.Continuity test(.Control unit.&.)&.*&.&.'Coupling(.(&(.&(.*&(.Current pick-up.

Data block.*&.Dealership identifier.*Dealership number.*Default measurement(.)Degree of suspicion.Device mounting.*Diagnosis.Diagnosis log.(Diagnosis object.*&.)&.Diagnostic adapter.Diagnostic bus*.'&*.(Diagnostic cable.Diagnostic connection.Diagnostic function

Adaption.Erase adaption values.

Erase fault memory.)Final control diagnosis.Interrogate fault memory.(Read data block.*Update programming.

Diagnostic strategy.

Page 242: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Manuel d’utilisation VAS 505116-2 C79298-A3238-X140-04-19

Index

Dialog box'.&'.'&'.&.Digital Storage Oscilloscope.&(.&(.&(.'&.&.&.)&.Diode test(.Direct and Alternating Current Mea-surement

direct(.Direct and alternating Current Mea-surement

via current pick-up(.)Direct and Alternating Voltage Mea-surement(.Direct current measurement.&(.&.'&.&.Display group.*&.Document'.'&.&.&.'&.(&.*&.&.Draw mode(.DSO Measuring lead.

1

End-user part.&.Energy-saving mode.Enter workshop code / Change dea-lership identifier*.Equipment mounting.'Error Message.Expanded functions*.&*.

$

FaultPermanent.Sporadic.

Fault characteristics.&.&.Fault memory.(&.)&.&.&.&.)&.&.&.*&.&.

erase.)interrogation.(

Fault memory contents .& .& .&.&.(Fault symptom.&.&.Final control diagnosis.Forming the Storage battery.Function.Function test .& .&.'&.& .& .'& .& .(& .)& .& .*&.&.Function/component selection.)&.&.&.&.&.*Fuse.&.'&.

Change.

General Information .& .'& .)&.General Notes.Go to menu).Guided fault finding .)& .& .&'.&'.(&.&(.&(.&(.'&.&.

Complaint report.Connection to vehicle.Diagnosis log.(Digital Storage Oscilloscope .

)Documents.*DSO.)Exit.*Fault memory contents.Function test.

log.(Function/component selection

.Interrupt.Overview.Start.Target menu.'Test plan.Vehicle identification.Vehicle system test.)

)

Hard copy.Help.

Contents.with buttons.'with topics.

Image drum unit.Image position(.Importer number.*Indicator'.&'.Individual diagnosis.Information box(.)&(.Information window'.&'.&'.*&.&.(&.&.)&.&.&.&.(&.&.&.&.&.&.'Initial graphic*.&.Initial Screen.&(.&.Inline current(.

Page 243: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Index

Manuel d’utilisation VAS 505116-3C79298-A3238-X140-04-19

InterfaceCentronics.(&.&.&.IrDA.(&.&.)&.

Interrogate fault memory.'IrDA

Adapter.&.&.&.&.&.&.'&.(

Troubleshooting.'Interface.(&.&.)&.

<

Job code.&.

3

Key CD.&*.Keyboard

Alphanumeric.*&'.&'.)&'.*&.

Numeric'.&'.&.&.Operation'.Virtual'.&.&*.&.'

keyboardNumeric.)

kV pick-up.

4

LED.&.'&.&.&.&.&.'&.&.'&.

bar.'lines.Row.&.*

Log.

Mask'.&.&.Measure mode(.&(.Measurement type(.'&(.&.&.(&.&.)&.Measuring lead.&.&.&.&.)&(.(&(.&(.&(.&(.'&(.&*.&.&.'&.&.(&.

Care and Maintenance.(COM measuring lead.&.&

.&.)&.&.(Combo diagnostic cable & .

&.&.*Diagnostic adapter .& .&

.*&.&.&.

Diagnostic cable&.&.&.&.*&.&.(&.&.&.(&.)&.&*.(&.'&.&.

LT.&.&.*&.DSO measuring lead.&.*&

.(Structure.U/R/D Measuring Lead(.'&.

&.(U/R/D measuring lead.&.&

.)Work process.)

measuring leadCOM measuring lead'.'

Measuring mode(.*Meßkabel

Diagnoseadapter'.Diagnosekabel'.

LT'.Kombi-Diagnosekabel'.

Mode(.&).&.Auto(.&(.)Auto level(.&(.&(.)Auto setup(.&(.Draw(.Normal(.&(.)Single(.&(.)

Multimedia).Select title).Start video).

Multimeter (.& (.&(.& .&.&.&.(&.&.)

.

Navigation bar'.&'.(&.&(.&.&.'&.&.&.Normal Mode(.Normal mode(.)

OBDII.'&.Operating buttons'.&'.'&'.(Operating Mode.&.)&'.&'.'&.&.&*.&.Operating System.Operation

Page 244: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Manuel d’utilisation VAS 505116-4 C79298-A3238-X140-04-19

Index

Keyboard'.Tester'.Touchscreen'.VAS 5051'.

/

Paper cassette.Parts List.(&.Pause.Permanent fault.Pick-up

Current pick-up.&.&.&.*&(.'&(.)&(.&.&.)&.&.

kV pick-up .& .& .'& .*&.*

Trigger pick-up.&.&.&.*&'.(&(.&.*

PickupCurrent pick-up'.kV pickup'.(

Print.Print format/tsee Administration *.Printer.&.*&.&.&.)&.

Back.(Care and Maintenance.(Display box.Display field .& .& .&

.)&.*&.Driver.Drum.'&.(&.*&.

Cleaning.Drum unit.&.&.'&.

& .(& .& .)&.&.

Front.Image drum unit.Insert toner cartridge.Loading Paper.Paper Bin.Paper Jam.Paper tray*.Print format/tsee Administration

*.Structure

Front.Toner.&.'&.(&.Toner Cartridge.&.'&.

&.&.)&.*inserting the.

Toner cassette.

Troubleshooting.Work process.

Printer Settings.Probe Rate(.

@

Quit'.*

0

Repair part.Replacement part.(&.Resistance Measurement(.*&(.Reversed polarity.

SAESociety of Automotive Engi-

neers Normenwerk .&.'

Safety.Safety Notices&Safety notices.Save result.Screen capture.Screen dump.

Of a multimedia file).Screen shot(.Scroll bar'.&'.&.'&.&.*&.&.Selection Bar.Selection bar.*&'.&'.&'.'&.&*.&*.Self-diagnosis

log.Self-diagnosislog.Self-test*.&*.'&*.&.&.'&.

Diagnostic bus*.'&*.(&.Test Instrument *.'& *.& .&

.'Set date*.)Set time*.)&*.*Set up

Making the Connection.Preparation.Turning on the Tester.

Shortage of Toner.'Shut down interval.

Page 245: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Index

Manuel d’utilisation VAS 505116-5C79298-A3238-X140-04-19

Sight Check.Signal generator*.Signal tone(.&*.&*.&.Single Mode(.Single mode(.)Slide control'.&.&(.(&(.)&(.&*.Sporadic fault.Standby mode.&.Start

Administration*.Guided fault finding.Help.Test Instrument(.Vehicle self-diagnosis.

Start Mask'.'&.&.&.)&*.&*.&.&.Start mask).Startup.&.)&.

Switching off.Storage battery&.&.&.(&.&.&.'&.

Change.Forming.

StructureMeasuring lead.Printer

Back.(Front.

Tester.Back.)Front.Left side.Right side.(Top.

VAS 5051.Workshop trolley.*

Structure and Mode of Operation.Submask'.'&.'&.'Switching off the tester.&.

"

Target menu.'Test dialog.(Test Instrument .& '.& '.(& .&.&(.&.&.'&.&*.'&*.&.&.'&.&.(&.&.)&.*&.

Calibrate(.'Channel A (.&(.&(.&(.

&(.Channel B (.& (.& (.& (.

&(.

Continuity test(.Digital Storage Oscilloscope (.

'Diode test(.Direct and Alternating Current

Measurementdirect(.

Direct and alternating CurrentMeasurement

via current pick-up(.)Direct and Alternating Voltage

Measurement(.DSO(.'Freeze frame with a cursor dis-

played(.'Freeze frame with both cursors

displayed(.(Function block(.'&(.&(.&(.

)&(.*&(.&(.Image position(.Measure mode(.&(.Multimeter(.Overview(.Probe Rate(.Resistance Measurement(.*Self-test.'Start(.Trigger mode(.&(.*&(.

Test instruments*.Channel A(.(&(.*&(.Channel B(.(&(.*Image position(.Time base(.&(.Trigger mode(.*Voltage DSO1(.

Test plan.&.&.'&.&.&.& .)& .'& .& .)& .& .&.&.(&.&.

Individual.&.&.(&.Test steps.&.&.&.(Tester

Back.)Care and Maintenance.Display box(.&(.(&(.Display field'.&(.'&(.&(.&

(.)&(.*&(.*&(.&(.&(.&(.&.)

Front.Left side.Operation'.Right side.(Structure.Top.Troubleshooting.Work process.)

Page 246: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Manuel d’utilisation VAS 505116-6 C79298-A3238-X140-04-19

Index

Tester mounting'.Time base(.&(.&(.Toner cassette.Toner low.Touchscreen.&.)&.&'.&'.&'.&'.'&'.&'.(&'.&'.)&).&.&.&.&.&.'

Clean.Operation'.

Trigger(.*&(.&(.&.gauge(.*&(.level.'pick-up.point(.*signal(.&(.&(.&.'

TroubleshootingClassification.Computer.Drum.'Error Message.Exchanging Components.(IrDA Adapter.'Measuring lead.'Paper Jam.Printer.Self-test.

Computer hardware.Test Instrument and diagno-

stic bus unit.Test Instrument.Tester.Toner.'

=

Update*.&*.'&.'Installation*.'

VAS 5051Operation'.Structure.Work process.

Vehicle identification '.& .& .&.&.(&.&.Vehicle self-diagnosis.&.&'.&'.(&.&(.&(.&(.'&.&.&.'&.'&.&.

Adaption.Erase adaption values.

Erase fault memory.)Exit.)

Fault memory.'&.interrogation.(

Final control diagnosis.Function.OBDII.Overview.Read data block.*Select diagnostic function.Select vehicle system.Start.Update programming.Vehicle system.

Vehicle system.&.*&.&.&.&.'&.&.(&.)&.*&.&.&.&.&.'&.&.&.)&.*&.&.)&.*&.&.&.&.(&.&.&.'vehicle system.Vehicle system test.&.*&.Voltage DSO1(.

-

Work interruption.Work process

Measuring lead.)Printer.Tester.)VAS 5051.Workshop trolley.)

Work window'.&'.&'.(&.&.&.*&*.Workshop Code.)

Dealership identifier.*Dealership number.*Importer number.*

Workshop code*.Dealership identifier .(& *.&

*.Dealership number*.Importer number*.

Workshop trolley.*&.&.&.&.&.&.(

Care and Maintenance.(Structure.*Work process.)

workshop trolleyUsing the tester without'.

>

Zero potential.

Page 247: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

xxx

Page 248: Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS 5051read.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/comm/901319/Manual_vas5051_310_gb.pdf · Operating Manual VAS 5051 C79298-A3238-X120-04-19

Designation Order number

Operating Manual VAS 5051 (with folder) 7KE3180-1xx

xx LanguageAA GermanAB Polish

AC Czech

AD Hungarian

AE English GB

AF English USA, Canada

AG Dutch

AH Swedish

AJ Danish

AK French

AL Italian

AM Spanish

AN Portuguese

AP Croat

AQ Japanese

AR Finnish

AS Greek

AT Chinese

AU Russian

AV Turkish

AW Hebrew

BA Romanian

BB Macedonian

BC Norwegian

BD Slovenian

BE Slovakian

We have verified that the contents of the printed document match the described hardware and software. Nevertheless, the possibility of discrepancies cannot be excluded, and consequently we cannot give any guarantee of complete conformance. The information given in this document is, however, checked on a regular basis and necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. We would therefore be grateful for any suggestions for improvement you may have.

Subject to technical changes.

Distribution or reproduction of this manual, or exploitation or disclosure of its contents, is not permitted without express consent. Infringements of the copyright shall be liable to claims for payment of damages. All rights reserved, in particular in the event of patent issue or utility model registration.

Copyright Volkswagen AG 2000 All Rights Reserved

Volkswagen Aktiengesellschaft Printed in Germany

Language key